Alfawiki.nl

Alfawiki.nl

Dear Client,Thank you for choosing Alfa Romeo.
Your Alfa GT has been designed to guarantee the safety, comfort and driving pleasure typical of Alfa Romeo.
This booklet will help you to get to know the characteristics and operation of your car.
The following pages contain all the indications necessary for you to be able to maintain the high standards of performance, quality, safety andrespect for the environment which characterise this Alfa GT.
The enclosed Warranty Booklet also contains the regulations, the warranty certificate and a guide to the services offered by Alfa Romeo.
Services which are essential and precious because, when you purchase an Alfa Romeo, you are not only acquiring a car, but the tranquillity thatcomes from knowing that an efficient, willing and widespread organisation is at your service for any assistance problems you may have.
Nature benefits in two ways: there’s no pollution from waste disposal and the demand for raw materials is reduced.
Enjoy the reading. And have a good trip.

This booklet describes all the versions of the Alfa GT, so you should only consider the information concerning thetrim level, engine and version purchased by you.

Alfawiki.nl

1

VERY IMPORTANT!
FUEL CAPACITYK

Petrol engines: only use unleaded petrol with no less than 95 R.O.N.
Diesel engines: only refuel with diesel fuel conforming to the European specification EN590. The use of other products or
mixtures may irreparably damage the engine with invalidation of the warranty due to the damage caused.

STARTING THE ENGINE
Petrol engines with mechanical transmission: make sure that the handbrake is engaged; set the gearshift leverto neutral, fully depress the clutch without pressing the accelerator, then turn the ignition key to AVV and release it as soon
as the engine has started.
Petrol engine with Selespeed transmission: keep the brake pedal fully depressed, turn the ignition key to AVV andrelease it as soon as the engine has started; the transmission sets to neutral automatically (the display shows position N).
JTD engines: turn the ignition key to MAR and wait for the Y and m warning lights to go off; turn the ignition key
to AVV and release it as soon as the engine has started.

PARKING ON FLAMMABLE MATERIALWhile working, the catalyst develops a very high temperature. Do not park the car over grass, dry leaves, pine needles or
any other inflammable materials: risk of fire.

Alfawiki.nl

2

RESPECTING THE ENVIRONMENTU

The car is fitted with a system that allows continuous diagnosis of the components correlated with emissions to ensure better respect for the environment.

ACCESSORY ELECTRICAL DEVICES쇵

If after purchasing the car you wish to install accessories that need an electrical supply (with the risk of gradually draining
the battery), contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services who will assess the overall electrical absorption and check whether the
car system is able to withstand the load required.

CODE CARD (for versions/markets where applicable)
Keep it in a safe place, not in the car. IT is advisable to always keep the electronic code on the CODE card with you in caseemergency starting is necessary.

SCHEDULED SERVICING
Correct maintenance makes it possible to preserve car performance levels and safety, respect for the environment and low
running costs unaltered over the course of time.

THE OWNER HANDBOOK…
…you will find important information, advice and warnings for correct use, driving safety and car maintenance over time.
Pay particular attention to the symbols " (personal safety) # (protecting the environment) â (car safety).

Alfawiki.nl

3Any queries concerning servicing should be forwarded to the showroom from which the car was purchased, the subsidiary company or to ourbranch offices or any point of the Alfa Romeo Network.
Warranty Booklet
The Warranty Booklet is delivered together with every new car and contains the regulations tied to the services given by Alfa Romeo Services
and to the warranty conditions.
Correctly carrying out the scheduled services specified by the manufacturer is the best way to maintain the performance, safety characteristics
and low running costs of your car. It is also necessary to maintain warranty cover.
“Service” guideThis contains Alfa Romeo Authorised Services. The Services can be recognised by the presence of the Alfa Romeo badge and logo.
The Alfa Romeo organisation in Italy can be found in the telephone directory under the letter “A” Alfa Romeo.
Not all of the models described in this booklet are available in all countries. Only some of the fittings described in this booklet are fitted as standard to the car. The list of available accessories should be requested from the Alfa Romeo Dealers.

Alfawiki.nl

4

THE SYMBOLS USED IN THIS BOOKLET
The symbols illustrated in these pages show the subjects
which should, in particular, be closely studied.

PERSONAL
SAFETY

Warning. Partially or fully ignoringthese rules may lead toserious injury.

PROTECTING THE
ENVIRONMENTThis indicates the correct procedures
to be followed to prevent the carfrom damaging the environment.

CAR SAFETY

Warning. Partially or fully ignoring theserules may lead to serious damage beingcaused to the car which, in somecircumstances, may cause forfeiture of thewarranty cover.

The texts, illustrations and specifications given in this booklet refer to the car at the time of going to press.
As part of our ongoing striving to improve our products, Alfa Romeo may introduce technical changes during production,
therefore the specifications and fittings may be altered without prior notice.
For details on this subject, please apply to the manufacturer’s sales network.

Alfawiki.nl

5

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
SYMBOLS

THE ALFA ROMEO
CODE SYSTEM

On some of the components making up
your Alfa GT, or near to them, special
coloured labels have been attached. Theselabels bear symbols that remind you of the
precautions to be taken as regards that particular component. A summary list of thesymbols (fig.1) is to be found under thebonnet.
A0A00621b

KEYS

To increase protection against attempted
theft, the car is fitted with an electronic engine lock system (Alfa Romeo CODE) whichis activated automatically when the key isremoved from the ignition. In fact the gripof each key contains an electronic device
which modulates the radio frequency signaltransmitted when the engine is started by aspecial aerial incorporated in the ignition
switch. This modulated signal is the “password” by which the control unit recognises
the key and only in this condition can theengine be started.

A0A1118b

The car is delivered with a key with metal insert (upon request for models/markets
where required) and a key with remote control. For models/markets where required
two keys with remote control can be provided.
KEY WITHOUT REMOTE
CONTROL (for versions/markets where applicable)
The fixed metallic insert A-fig. 2 operates:– the ignition switch;– the driver’s door lock;– the passenger’s Air bag deactivation (upon request for versions/markets where applicable);– the fuel filler cap lock.

Alfawiki.nl

6

fig. 1

fig. 2

Together with the keys the CODE card isprovided (for versions/ markets where applicable) (fig. 3), bearing in print the key
codes (both mechanical and electronic for
emergency start up).

The driver should always keep the electronic CODE card with him/her in the eventof having to carry out emergency starting.

If the car changes owner,
the new owner must be
given all the keys and theCODE card.

The code numbers on the CODE card must
be kept in a safe place , not in the car.

KEY WITH REMOTE CONTROLThe key with remote control (fig. 4) isfitted with:– a metal insert (A) that can be enclosed
in the key grip
– a button (B) for power-assisted opening of the metal insert– a button (C) for remote door unlocking and at the same time switching off theelectronic alarm– a button (D) for remote door locking
and at the same time switching on the electronic alarm

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

IMPORTANT To guarantee the perfect
efficiency of the electronic devices containedin keys, avoid letting them directly exposed
to sunrays.

– a button (E) for remote boot unlocking– removable hook ring (F).

A0A0003b

A0A0600b

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 3

fig. 4

7

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

The metal insert (A) of the key operates:

To insert the metal insert in the key grip:

OPENING THE TAILGATE– the ignition switch– keep the button (B) pressed– driver’s door lock and, upon request forversions/markets where applicable, the passenger’s door lock– move the metal insert (A)The tailgate can be opened from outside byremote control pressing button (E), even if theelectronic alarm is on. Opening of the tailgate
is accompanied by the direction indicators
flashing twice; closing is accompanied by asingle flash.

– the passenger’s side Air bag deactivation switch
To bring the metal insert out of the key
grip, press the button (B).
To pull out the hook ring (F) use a finely
pointed object (e.g. pen) and work in the
direction of the arrow.

The button B should only
be pressed when the key isaway from the body, inparticular from the eyes, and fromobjects that can be spoilt (clothes
for instance). Make sure the key
can never be touched by others, especially children, who may inadvertently press the button.

– release the button (B) and turn the metal insert (A) until hearing the click as it locks
into place.
To unlock the doors by remote control press
button (C), the doors unlock and the direction indicators flash twice. To lock the doors
by remote control, press button (D), thedoors lock and the direction indicators flash
once. Pressing button (C) the doors are released, if within the next 60 seconds a door
or the tailgate are not opened, the system automatically locks everything again.
On cars fitted with electronic alarm system,
pressing button (C) turns it off, pressing button (D) turns it on.

Alfawiki.nl

8

If the electronic alarm is fitted, when the
tailgate is opened the alarm system switches off volumetric protection and the tailgate
control sensor, the system (with the exception of versions for certain markets) “beeps”
twice.
Closing the tailgate again, the control functions are restored, the system “beeps” twice(with the exception of certain markets).

Each time the ignition key is turned to the
STOP position the Alfa Romeo CODE system
deactivates the functions of the engine electronic control unit.
Each time the car is started turning the ignition key to MAR, the Alfa Romeo CODE
control unit sends a recognition code to theengine control unit to deactivate the inhibitor. The code is crypted and variable between over four billion possible combinations, and it is sent only if the system control unit has recognised the code transmitted from the key which contains an electronic transmitter, through an aerial woundaround the ignition switch.
If the code has not been recognised correctly, the Alfa Romeo CODE warning light(Y) on the cluster turns on.

IMPORTANT Every key has its own
code, which must be memorised by the system control unit. To memorise new keys, up
to a maximum of eight, apply solely to Alfa Romeo Authorised Services taking withyou all the keys in your possession, theCODE card, a personal identity document
and the car’s ownership documents.

The codes of any keys notpresented during the memorising procedure are
erased. The reason for this is to ensure that any lost or stolen keys
cannot be used to start the engine.

In this case, the key should be moved to
the STOP position and then back to MAR;if the lock continues, possibly try again withthe other key provided with the car. If it isstill not possible to start the car, follow the
instructions given in the “In an emergency”
chapter and then contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

IMPORTANT Turning on of the Alfa
Romeo CODE warning light (Y) when travelling with the ignition key at MAR:
1) If the warning light turns on, this meansthat the system is running a self-test (for example for a voltage drop). At the first stop,
it will be possible to test the system: switch
off the engine turning the ignition key to
STOP; then turn the ignition key to MAR:the warning light turns on and should go off
in about one second. If the warning lightstays on, repeat the procedure described previously leaving the key at STOP for over
30 seconds. Should the inconvenience persists, contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

OPERATION

2) For versions without the reconfigurable
multifunction display, the flashing of thewarning light means that the car is not protected by the engine inhibitor device. Thiscondition for cars with reconfigurable multifunction display is shown by the turning onof the warning light together with the display of the message: “CODE SYSTEM NOT PROGRAMMED”. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorised
Services immediately to have all the keys
memorised.

Alfawiki.nl

9

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

If after about 2 seconds
with the ignition key atMAR, for versions without
reconfigurable multifunction display, the Alfa Romeo CODE warning light (Y) turns on again flashing, or for versions with reconfigurable multifunction display, thewarning light turns on again together with the message “CODESYSTEM NOT PROGRAMMED”, thismeans that the code of the keys
has not been stored, therefore thecar is not protected by the Alfa
Romeo CODE system against attempted theft. In this case contact
Alfa Romeo Authorised Services tohave the key codes stored.

Battery replacement:

KEY BATTERYREPLACEMENT
If when pressing button (B or C-fig. 6)
on the remote control, nothing happens, thebattery should be replaced by a new oneof the same type to be found c/o normal
retailers.

– using a finely-tipped screwdriver, turnthe opening device (C) and pull out the battery holder (D);– replace the battery (E) making sure thatthe bias is correct;

Used batteries are harmful to the environment.
They should be disposed ofas specified by law in the special
containers provided. Avoid exposure to naked flames and high temperatures. Keep out of reach ofchildren.

A0A0603b

Alfawiki.nl

10– press button (A-fig. 5) and move themetal insert (B) to the open position;

fig. 5– re-insert the battery holder in the key
and lock it, turning the device (C).

DESCRIPTION
The system comprises: a transmitter, receiver, control unit with siren and volumetric sensors. The electronic alarm is controlled
by the receiver incorporated in the instrument cluster and it is turned on and off by
the remote control in the key which sends
the crypted and variable code. The electronic
alarm controls: the unlawful opening ofdoors, bonnet and boot (perimetral protection), operation of the ignition key, battery
cable cutting, the presence of moving bodies in the passenger compartment (volumetric protection), any abnormal raising/sloping of the car (for versions/markets where applicable) and central door locking. It also makes it possible to cut off thevolumetric protection.

The remote control is incorporated in the
key and it is fitted with buttons (B-C-Dfig. 6) that activate the corresponding control sending the code to the receiver. This
code (rolling code) changes at each transmission.

With the doors, bonnet and boot shut andthe ignition key in the STOP or PARK position (key removed), point the key with theremote control in the direction of the car, thenpress and release the button (C-fig. 6).
With the exception of certain markets, thesystem sounds a “beep” and the doors arelocked.

REQUEST FOR ADDITIONAL
KEYS WITHREMOTE CONTROLThe receiver can recognise up to 5 keys
with incorporated remote control. Should a
new key with remote control be necessary
for any reason during the life of the car, contact directly Alfa Romeo Authorised Services,taking with you the CODE card, a personal
identity document and the car’s ownership
documents.

IMPORTANT The engine inhibitor function is guaranteed by the Alfa Romeo CODE
system which is activated automaticallywhen the ignition key is removed.

HOW TO ACTIVATE THE ALARM

Engagement of the alarm is preceded bya self-diagnostic test indicated by a different
flashing frequency of the deterrent led (Afig. 7) on the dashboard. If a fault is detected the system sounds a further warning “beep”.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

ELECTRONIC ALARM

A0A0601b
A0A0005b

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 6

fig. 711

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Surveillance
After switching on, the flashing of the deterrent led (A-fig. 7) on the dashboard indicates the system surveillance mode. The
led flashes throughout this period.

HOW TO DEACTIVATETHE ALARM
To deactivate the alarm press the button (Bfig. 6) of the key with remote control. The
system will react as follows (with the exception of certain markets):

1 flash:one or more doors– two brief flashes of the direction indicators

2 flashes:

tailgate

3 flashes:bonnetSelf-diagnostic functions
and door, bonnet, boot control– two brief “beeps” of the system

4 flashes:

ultrasounds– door unlocking.

5 flashes:

If, after engaging the alarm, a second“beep” is sounded, switch off the systempressing the button (B-fig. 6), check thatthe doors, bonnet and tailgate are properly
shut, then switch the system on again pressing the button (C). Otherwise, the door,
bonnet or tailgate that is not shut properly
will be excluded from the alarm system control.

IMPORTANT If when the system isturned off the deterrent led (A-fig. 7) on
the dashboard stays on (maximum 2 minutes or until the ignition key is set to MAR)the following should be borne in mind:

abnormal car lifting/sloping (for versions/markets
where applicable)

6 flashes:

tampering with car starting
cables

7 flashes:

tampering with battery cables or cutting emergency
key cables

8 flashes:

connection line to sensors
and siren

9 flashes:at least three causes ofalarm.

IMPORTANT Operation of the electronic
alarm is adapted at the origin to the rulesof the different countries.

If the doors, bonnet and boot are shut correctly and the control signal is repeated, thesystem self-diagnostic has detected a system operating fault. It is therefore necessary
to contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

Alfawiki.nl

12– if the led continues flashing, but at different intervals than normal, this means thatdifferent attempts to break in have occurred.
Through the number of flashes it is possible to identify the type of attempt:When the system is on, the alarm comes
into action in the following cases:– opening of one of the doors, bonnet or
tailgate;– disconnection of the battery or sectioning of electric cables;– intrusion in the passenger compartment,
for example breakage of windows (volumetric protection);– attempt to start the engine (key in
MAR position);– abnormal car lifting/sloping (for versions/markets where applicable).
Depending on the markets, the cutting inof the alarm causes operation of the siren
and hazard warning lights (for about 26 seconds). The ways of operating and the number of cycles may vary depending on themarkets.
A maximum number of cycles is howeverenvisaged.
Once the alarm cycle has ended, the system resumes its normal control function.

VOLUMETRIC PROTECTION
To make sure that the protection system
works correctly the side windows and sunroof (if fitted) must be properly shut.
The function can be cut off (if, for example, leaving animals in the car) carrying out
the following operations in rapid succession:
starting from the condition with the ignition key at MAR, move the key to STOP,
then immediately back to MAR and thento STOP again, then remove the ignition
key.
The deterrent led (A-fig. 7) on the dashboard lights up for about 2 seconds to confirm that the function has been cut off.
To restore volumetric protection, move theand keep the ignition key at MAR for over
30 seconds.

HOW TO CUT OFF
THE ALARM SYSTEM
To deactivate the alarm system completely (for instance during prolonged inactivityof the car) simply lock the car turning the
key in the lock.
MINISTERIAL CERTIFICATION
In accordance with the law in force in eachcountry, on the subject of radio frequency,
we wish to point out that for the markets inwhich the transmitter needs to be marked,
the certification number is given on the component.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

WHEN THE ALARM IS
TRIGGERED

Depending on the versions/markets, thecode may also be given on the transmitter
and/or on the receiver.

If, with the volumetric protection function
deactivated, an electric control controlled by
the ignition key at MAR (e.g. power windows) turn the ignition key to MAR, operate the control and move the key to
STOP in a maximum time of 30 seconds.
This way volumetric protection is not restored.

Alfawiki.nl

13

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

IGNITION DEVICE

IMPORTANT Do not leave the key inthis position when the engine is stopped.

SWITCH (fig. 8)– AVV: unstable position for starting theengine.

The key can be turned to one of four positions:

IMPORTANT If the engine fails to start
move the key back to STOP and repeat.

– STOP: engine switched off, key can beremoved, engine inhibitor engaged, steering lock engaged, services excluded apartfrom those supplied directly (e.g. hazard
warning lights).

The ignition switch has a safety device
which prevents passage to AVV when theengine is running.

– MAR: drive position. The engine lockis deactivated and all electrical devices are
powered.

– PARK: engine switched off, key canbe removed, engine lock engaged, steering lock engaged, sidelights switched on automatically.
IMPORTANT To turn the key to the
PARK position, button (A) on the switch
must be pressed first.

A0A0016b

Alfawiki.nl

14

fig. 8When leaving the car always remove the key fromthe ignition to prevent any
occupants of the car from accidentally activating the controls. Never leave children in the car unaccompanied. Remember to engage
the handbrake and, if the car isparked on an uphill slope, to engage the first gear. If the car is facing downhill, engage reverse gear.

If the ignition device istampered with (for example an attempted theft)
have it checked over by Alfa
Romeo Authorised Services before
travelling again.

DOORSOPENING/CLOSINGFROM INSIDEEngaging:– move the key to STOP or PARK, thenremove the key and turn the steering wheelslightly to facilitate the locking action.

Before opening a door, always make sure that it canbe done safely.

Disengaging:– turn the key to MAR gently rocking thesteering wheel from side to side.

– To open the door, pull the handle(A-fig. 10).
– To close the door, pull it; then to prevent
opening from the outside, press the button(A-fig. 11) on the dashboard, the deterrent led (B) on the button lights up with ayellow light to confirm that locking has taken place.

OPENING/CLOSINGFROM OUTSIDE
Front doors

Never remove the ignition
key with the car on themove. The steering wheel
would lock automatically the firsttime the steering wheel is turned.
This also occurs if the car is towed.

Front doors– To open the door, turn the key (clockwise
for the driver’s door and, upon request for versions/markets where applicable, counterclockwise for the passenger’s door), then remove the key and pull the lever (A-fig. 9).

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARSTEERING LOCK– To close the door, turn the key in thelock in the opposite direction to the one for
opening.
It is absolutely forbidden
to carry out whatever after-market operation involving steering system or steering column modifications (e.g.: installation of anti-theft device) that
could badly affect performance andsafety, cause the lapse of warranty and also result in non-compliance of the car with homologation
requirements.

A0A0017b

A0A0018b

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 9fig. 1015

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARFRONT SEATSCENTRAL LOCKING
This allows central locking of the door
locks.

Only make adjustments
when the car is stationary.

To engage central locking, the doors mustbe perfectly shut, otherwise locking is denied.
IMPORTANT With central locking engaged, pulling the inside lever for opening
one of the front doors causes the unlocking of all the doors.

A0A0602b

Fabric upholstery of yourcar is purpose-made towithstand common wear
resulting from normal use of thecar. It is however absolutely necessary to prevent hard and/or prolonged scratching/scraping causedby clothing accessories like metallic buckles, studs, “Velcro” fixings,
etc. that stressing locally the fabriccould break yarns and damage theupholstery as a consequence.

In the event of a power cut off (blown
fuse, battery disconnected, etc.) it is still possible to work the lock by hand.
LENGTHWISE ADJUSTMENT(fig. 12)Raise the lever (A) and push the seat
backwards or forwards; in the driving position the arms should be slightly flexed andthe hands should rest on the rim of the steering wheel.

A0A0019b

Alfawiki.nl

16

fig. 11

fig. 12After releasing the adjustment lever, always
check that the seat islocked on the runners, trying tomove it to and fro. The lack of thisclamping action could cause theseat to move unexpectedly andcause loss of car control.

TILTING THE BACK REST (fig. 12)

CENTRAL ARMREST (fig. 13)

Turn the knob (D) until obtaining the most
comfortable position.

To gain access to the rear seats, pull thehandle (E), the back rest folds and the seatis free to run forwards.

The armrest, fitted on some versions, is adjustable and can be raised and lowered to
the required position.

DRIVER’S SEAT HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT (fig. 12)

A recovery mechanism with memory
makes it possible to take the seat back to
its previous position.

To adjust, slightly raise the armrest, thenpress the the release device (A).

To raise the seat, pull the lever (B) upwards, then work the lever (up and down)
until reaching the required height, then release it. To lower the seat, push the lever(B) downwards, then work the lever (upand down) until reaching the required
height.

Once the seat back has been returned tothe travelling condition, make sure that it
is correctly clamped, checking that the “redband” on the upper part of the handle (E)is concealed. In fact, this “red band” indicates that the seat back is not clamped.

IMPORTANT Adjustment must be carried out only seated in the driver’s seat.

Inside the armrest there is an oddments
compartment, to use it, raise the cover,pressing the device (B).

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

DRIVER’S SEAT LUMBAR
ADJUSTMENT (fig. 12)

Also check that the seat is firmly locked on
the runners, trying to move it to and fro.
BACK REST ANGLE
ADJUSTMENT (fig. 12)
Turn the knob(C) until reaching the position required.

A0A0023b

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 1317

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

SEAT WARMING (fig. 14)
Seat warming, fitted on certain versions,is turned on and off through the switch (A)on the outer side of the seat.
Switching on is shown by the lighting upof the led (B) on the switch itself.

HEADREST ADJUSTMENT(fig. 15)
To increase passengers’ safety, the headrests are adjustable in height.
To adjust, press the button (A) and movethe headrest up or down until it clicks into
place.
IMPORTANT The configuration of theheadrest cushion may vary depending on
the versions and markets. The purpose of
the illustration is only to show how it is adjusted.

Remember that headrests
should be adjusted so thatthe nape, and not the neck,rests on them. Only in this position
do they exert their protective action in the event of a crash frombehind.

REAR POCKETS (fig. 16)(for versions/markets whereapplicable)
The front seats are fitted with a pocket in
the rear of the back rest.

A0A0024b

A0A0604b

A0A0026b

Alfawiki.nl

18

fig. 14

fig. 15

fig. 16

Fabric upholstery of yourcar is purpose-made towithstand common wear
resulting from normal use of thecar. It is however absolutely necessary to prevent hard and/or prolonged scratching/scraping causedby clothing accessories like metallic buckles, studs, “Velcro” fixings,
etc. that stressing locally the fabriccould break yarns and damage theupholstery as a consequence.

EXTENDING THE
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT

Removing the rear parcel shelf

The split of rear seat makes it possible toextend the luggage compartment totally or
partially, acting separately on one of the twoparts, thereby offering different possibilities
of load depending on the number of rearpassengers.

– free the ends of the two rods (A-fig. 18)
supporting the parcel shelf (B) pulling theeyelets (C) off the pins (D);Proceed as follows:– release the pins (A-fig. 19) at the outside of the shelf from their housings (B) obtained in the side supports, then remove theshelf pulling it outwards.

If a particularly heavy
load is placed in the boot,when travelling at night, it
is wise to check the height of thehigh beams (see “Headlamps”
paragraph).

A0A0605b

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARREAR SEATS

A0A0255b

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 18

fig. 19

19

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Total extension
Proceed as follows:– check that seat buckles of the side belts
are fitted in the respective pockets on theback rest (A-fig. 20) and the tab (B)of the centre abdominal belt is inserted in
the support (C).
– pull the handles in the centre of the cushions, then tilt them forwards;– raise the headrest to the highest position, press both buttons (A-fig. 21) at theside of the two supports, then remove theheadrest pulling them upwards;– move the seat belts to the side extending them correctly without twisting;

IMPORTANT For versions/markets
where applicable, the retainer levers are replaced by buttons (one for each side). To release the back rests and tilt them, use thebuttons themselves.

– raise the levers (A-fig. 22) retaining
the back rests and tilt them forwards to obtain a single loading surface (fig. 23).
A0A0608 b

fig. 22
A0A0623b

A0A0607b

A0A0608 b

Alfawiki.nl

20

fig. 20

fig. 21

fig. 23

For partial extension, proceed as follows:– tilt the cushion required pulling the handle at the centre of the cushion, then tilting the actual cushion;– move the seat belt to one side extending it correctly without twisting;

HEADREST ADJUSTMENT(fig. 24)
The car may be fitted with two headrests
for the side seats and, depending on the trim
level, it may also have a third headrest in
the centre.

– raise the lever retaining the back rest
and tilt it forwards.

To use the headrest, raise it from the (2)“non use position” and reach the (1) “allremoved” position. To restore the “non use
position”, press button (A-fig. 21) andpush the headrest downwards.

To bring the seat back to its
normal position

All rear headrests can be removed.

The particular headrest shape interferes intentionally with the rear passenger’s correct
position on the back rest; this forces the passenger to raise the headrest to use it correctly.
IMPORTANT When using rear seats,
the headrests shall be kept in the “all removed” position.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Partial extension

Proceed as follows:– move the seat belts to one side extending them correctly without twisting;– raise the seat backs, pushing them backwards until hearing both clamping devices
click into place;– set the cushions to the horizontal position keeping the centre seat belt raised.

A0A0610b

Remember that headrests
should be adjusted so thatthe nape, and not the neck,rests on them. Only in this position
do they exert their protective action in the event of a crash frombehind.

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 24

21

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

CENTRAL ARMREST (fig. 25)
To use the armrest (A), present only on
certain versions, lower it as illustrated.

LUGGAGERETAINER NET(where provided)

STEERING WHEEL
The driver can adjust the steering wheel
position in rake and height.

Present only on certain versions, the retainer net (fig. 26) is helpful in correctly
arranging the load and/or suitable for transporting light materials.

To do this, release the lever (A-fig. 27)
pulling it towards the steering wheel.
After moving the steering wheel to themost suitable position, lock it pushing thelever fully forwards.

Any adjustment of thesteering wheel position
must be carried out onlywith the car stationary.

A0A0611b

A0A0624b

A0A0706b

Alfawiki.nl

22

fig. 25

fig. 26

fig. 27

OUTER

Folding (fig. 30)

Electric adjustment (fig. 29)– In the event of need (for example whenthe mirror causes difficulty in narrow spaces)
it is possible to fold the mirror moving it fromposition (A) to position (B).

– use the switch (A) to select the mirror
required (right or left);

INNER
The mirror, fitted with a safety device thatcauses it to be released in the event of aviolent crash, can be moved using the lever(A-fig. 28) to two different positions, normal or antiglare.

– pressing the button (B) in one of thefour directions, move the mirror selected previously;
When driving the mirrors
should always be in position (A).

– position the switch (A) in the intermediate locking position.
IMPORTANT Adjustment is possible only with the ignition key at MAR.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

REAR-VIEW MIRROR
ADJUSTMENT

As the driver’s wing mirror is curved, it may slightly alter the perception of
distance.

A0A0039b

A0A0040b

A0A0041b

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 28

fig. 29

fig. 30

23

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Defrosting/demisting (fig. 31-32)
The electric mirrors are fitted with heating coils which come into operation withrearscreen heating pressing the button (A)thereby defrosting and/or demisting the mirrors.
IMPORTANT The function is timed andautomatically switched off after a few minutes.

POWER WINDOWS

Driver’ side (fig. 33)

IMPORTANT With the ignition key at
STOP or removed, the power windows remain activated for about 3 minutes and aredeactivated immediately the moment a door
is opened.

The driver’s door panel contains the buttons that control the following windows,
with the ignition key at MAR:A - left front window
B - right front window.
Press the button to lower the window. Pull
to raise it.

A0A0042b

A0A0612b

A0A0043b

Alfawiki.nl

24

fig. 31

fig. 32

fig. 33

Passenger’s side (fig. 34)
The button (A) controls the passenger’s
side window.
Button and window operation is the sameas that described for driver’s side.

Improper use of the power windows can be dangerous. Before and during its
operation, always make sure thatpassengers are not exposed to therisk of harm either directly by themoving windows or by personal
objects drawn or knocked by them.

Always remove the ignition key when getting outof the car to prevent thepower windows being operated accidentally and constituting a danger
to the passengers in the car.

Do not keep the buttonpressed when the window
is completely raised or
lowered.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

IMPORTANT The driver’s power window
is fitted with the “continuous automatic operation” device for both lowering and raising
the window. A brief press on the upper orlower part of the button will cause it to moveand continue automatically: the window
stops in the required position by pressing either the upper or lower part of the button
again. The passenger window is fitted with
“automatic continuous operation” device justfor window opening.

A0A0044b

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 34

25

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

For all versions, after unlocking the doors,
keeping the remote control button pressed
for about 2 seconds will obtain window
opening.
IMPORTANT For versions/markets
where applicable, after turning off control
unit power (replacing or disconnecting thebattery or replacing the power window control unit protection fuses), window automatism shall be restored.

Proceed as follows with doors closed:

SEAT BELTS

1. open completely the driver’s window
keeping the button pressed for at least
3 seconds after full opening;

USING THE SEAT BELTS

2. close completely the driver’s window
keeping the button pressed for at least
3 seconds after full closing;
3. proceed as described in points 1 and2 also for the passenger’s side;
4. check for proper initialisation by operating the windows in automatic.

The belt should be worn keeping the chest
straight and rested against the seat back.
To fasten the seat belts: hold the
tongue (A-fig. 35) and insert it into thebuckle (B), until hearing the locking click.
At removal, if it jams, let it rewind for a shortstretch, then pull it out again without jerking.

A0A0045b

Alfawiki.nl

26

fig. 35

When the car is parked on a steep slope
the reel mechanism may block; this is normal. The reel mechanism prevents the webbing coming out when it is jerked or if thecar brakes sharply, in a collision or when cornering at high speed.

FRONT SEAT BELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT
Always adjust the height of the belts adapting it to the person who is wearing it. This
precaution improves their effectiveness substantially reducing the risk of injury in theevent of a crash.
Correct adjustment is obtained when thebelt passes half way between the end of theshoulder and the neck.
The front seat belt ring can take 4 different positions which make it possible to adjust the height of the belts.
To adjust, press button (A-fig. 36) andlower or raise the grip (B).

Never press button (C)when travelling.

Always adjust the seatbelt height when the car is
stationary.

After adjustment, always
check that the slider is anchored in one of the positions provided. To do this, with the
button (A) released, exert a further pressure to allow the anchor
device to catch if release did nottake place at one of the preset positions.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

To unfasten the seat belts: press
button (C-fig. 35). Guide the seat beltwith your hand while it is rewinding, to prevent it from twisting. Through the reel, thebelt automatically adapts to the body of thepassenger wearing it, allowing freedom of
movement.

A0A0685b

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 36

27

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARREAR BELTS
To fasten the belt: gently pull the belt fromits reel and guide the tape to prevent it fromtwisting, then insert the tongue (A-fig. 37)
into the buckle housing (B).
To unfasten the seat belts, press button (E).

Rear seat belts shall be worn as shown infig. 38. Fig. 39 shows improper belt fastening. To tilt the back rest see paragraph“Boot extension”.
IMPORTANT The centre rear seatbelt isinstalled on request only for versions/markets on which it is required.
IMPORTANT Remember that, in theevent of an accident, any passengers occupying the rear seats who are not wearing
a seat belt not only subject themselves togreat personal risk, but constitute a danger
to the occupants of the front seats.

PRE-TENSIONING DEVICES
To increase the efficiency of the front seatbelts, the car is fitted with pre-tensioning devices. These devices “feel” that the car isbeing subject to a violent impact by way of
a sensor and rewind the seat belts a few
centimetres. In this way they ensure thatthe seat belt adheres to the wearer before
the restraining action begins.
The seat belt locks to indicate that the device has intervened; the seat belt cannot be
drawn back up even when guiding it manually.
IMPORTANT The pretensioner will give
maximum protection when the seat belt adheres snugly to wearer’s chest and hips.

A0A0686b

A0A0386b

A0A0387b

Alfawiki.nl

28

fig. 37

fig. 38

fig. 39

The emergency tensioning retractor needs
no maintenance or lubrication. Any modification to its original features will nullify theretractor effectiveness. If, due to unusual
natural events (floods, high waves, etc.),
the device has been affected by water andmud, it must be replaced.

Pre-tensioning devices canonly be used once. Afterthey have been triggered
contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services to have them replaced. The
validity of the device is 10 years
from the date of production on the
sticker; the pretensioners should bechanged at an Alfa Romeo Authorised Service as this date approaches.

Operations involving banging, vibrations or heating(above 100°C for a maximum of 6 hours) in the area of thepretensioners may damage or trigger off the device. Vibrations fromrough road surfaces or accidental
jolting caused by mounting pavements etc. do not have any effect on
the pretensioner. If, however, youneed assistance, go to Alfa Romeo
Authorised Services.

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONSFOR THE USE OF THE SEATBELTS
All the occupants of the car are obliged torespect the local traffic laws regarding thewearing of seat belts.
Always fasten the seat belts before starting.
Seat belts are also to be worn by expectant mothers: the risk of injury in the caseof accident is greatly reduced for them andthe unborn child if they are wearing a seatbelt. Pregnant women must of course position the lower part of the belt very low down
so that it passes under the abdomen (as illustrated in fig. 40).

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Pretensioner activation may produce asmall amount of smoke. This smoke is in noway toxic and presents no fire hazard.

LOAD LIMITERS
To increase passengers’ protection in theevent of an accident, the front and rear(where provided) seat belt reels contain aload limiter which allows controlled sag insuch a way as to dose the force acting on
the shoulders and chest during the belt restraining action in case of a crash.

A0A0675b

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 40

29

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

IMPORTANT The seat belt must not be
twisted. The upper part must pass over theshoulder and diagonally across the chest. The
lower part must rest across the pelvis and not
across the (fig. 41) stomach. Do not use
devices (clips, stoppers, etc.) which keep thebelts away from the body.

To ensure the highest degree of protection, you arerecommended to keep theseat backrest in the straightest position possible, and the belt adhering well to the chest and pelvis.
Seat belts should always be wornin both the front and rear positions!
Travelling without seat belt increases the risk of serious injury or
death in the case of accident.

Under no circumstances
should the components ofthe seat belt and pretensioner be tampered with or removed. Any operation should be
carried out by qualified and authorised personnel. Always contact an
Alfa Romeo Authorised Service.

IMPORTANT Each seat belt shall be worn
only by one person: do not carry children on
your knee using a single seat belt for both(fig. 42). Do not fasten other objects to thebody.

A0A0673b

A0A0051b

Alfawiki.nl

30

fig. 41

fig. 42HOW TO KEEP THE SEAT BELTS
ALWAYS IN EFFICIENT
CONDITIONS– prevent the reels from getting wet: theircorrect operation is only guaranteed if water does not get inside;

To keep the seat belts always in efficientconditions, observe the following:– replace the seat belt if it shows significant wear or cut signs.

– always use the belts with the tape welltaut and never twisted; make sure that it
is free to run without impediments;– after a serious accident, replace the belt
being worn at that time, even if it does notappear damaged. Always replace the seatbelts if pretensioners have been activated;– to clean the belts, wash by hand withneutral soap, rinse and leave to dry in theshade. Never use string detergents, bleachor dyes or any other chemical substance thatmight weaken the fibres;

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

If the seat belt has been
subjected to shock, for example during an accident, it
must be completely replaced together with the attachments andtheir screws, and the pretensioning devices, even if visible defects
are not detected, as the belt may
have lost its resilience.

Alfawiki.nl

31

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARCARRYING
CHILDREN SAFELY
For optimal protection in the event of acrash, all passengers must be seated andwearing adequate restraint systems. This iseven more important for children.
This prescription is compulsory in all EC
countries according to EC Directive
2003/20/EC.
Compared with adults, their head is proportionally larger and heavier than the restof the body, while the muscles and bone
structure are not completely developed.
Therefore, correct restraint systems are necessary, other than adult seat belts.
The results of research on the best protection for a child are summarised in European Standard ECE- R44, which in addition
to making them compulsory, subdivides restraint systems into five groups:
Group 00 - 10 kg in weightGroup 0+0 - 13 kg in weightGroup 1

9 - 18 kg in weightGroup 215 - 25 kg in weightGroup 322 - 36 kg in weight

As it may be noted, the groups overlap
partly and in fact, in commerce it is possible
to find devices that cover more than one
weight group. All restraint devices must bear
the certification data, together with the control brand, on a solidly fixed label whichmust absolutely never be removed.
Over 1.50 m in height, from the point ofview of restraint systems, children are considered as adults and wear the seat belts
normally. Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo offers
seats for each weight group, which are therecommended choice, as they have been designed and experimented specifically for Alfa Romeo cars.

Never place cradle child’sseats facing backwards onthe front passenger seat ofcars fitted with passenger’s air bag
since the air bag activation could
cause serious injuries, even mortal.
You are advised to carry children
always on the rear seat, as this is
the most protected position in thecase of a crash.

Alfawiki.nl

32

SERIOUS DANGERChildren may placedon the front seat ofcars fitted with passenger’s air bag
deactivation. In this case, it is absolutely necessary to check thewarning light F on the instrument panel to make sure that deactivation has actually took place(see paragraph “Front passenger
air bag”). The front passenger’s
seat shall be adjusted in the mostbackward position to prevent any
contact between child’s seat anddashboard.

GROUP 1 (fig. 44)

Babies up to 13 kg must be carried facing behind on a cradle seat which, supporting the head, does not induce strain on theneck in the event of a sharp deceleration.

Starting from 9 to 18 kg in weight, children may be carried facing forwards withseats fitted with front cushion, throughwhich the car seat belt restrains both childand seat.

The cradle is restrained by the car safety
belts, as illustrated, and it should in turnrestrain the child with the belts incorporated on it.

A0A0659b

A0A0660b

The illustration is indicative only for assembly. Assemble the seat according
to the compulsory instructions provided with it.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARGROUP 0 AND 0+ (fig. 43)

Seats exist which are suitable for covering weightgroups 0 and 1 with a rearconnection to the car belts and its
own belts to restrain the child. Because of their mass, they can be
dangerous if installed incorrectly
fastened to the car belts with acushion. Strictly adhere to the assembly instructions provided.

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 43

fig. 4433

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARGROUP 2 (fig. 45)

GROUP 3 (fig. 46)

Starting from 15 to 25 kg in weight, children may be restrained directly by the carseat belts.

For children from 22 up to 36 kg thechild’s chest is thick enough not to need thespacer back rest anymore.

Child seats only have the function of positioning the child correctly in relation to thebelts, so that the diagonal part adheres tothe chest and never to the neck and that thehorizontal part adheres to the child’s pelvis
and not to the abdomen.

The figure shows proper child seat positioning on the rear seat.
Over 1.50 m in height, children may wear
seat belts like adults.

A0A0661b

A0A0662b

Alfawiki.nl

34

fig. 45

fig. 46

The illustration is indicative only for assembly. Assemble the seat according
to the compulsory instructions provided with it.

Your car complies with the new European Directive 2000/3/EC regulating child’s seat assembling on the different car seats according to
the following table:

Range of weight

Front
passenger

Rearpassengers

Centralpassenger

Group 0, 0+

up to 13 kg

U

U

U

Group 1

9-18 kg

U

U

U

Group 2

15-25 kg

U

U

U

Group 322-36 kg

U

U

U

Group

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

PASSENGER SEAT COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS ON CHILD’S SEAT USE

Key:
U = suitable for child restraint systems of the “Universal” category, according to European Standard EEC-R44 for the specified “Groups”.

Alfawiki.nl

35

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Below is a summary of the rulesof safety to be followed for carrying children:– All restraint systems are strictly for one
child only: never use for two children at thesame time.

– The recommended position for installinga child’s seat is on the rear seat, as it is themost protected in the event of a crash.

– Always make sure that the belts do notrest on the child’s neck.

– If the passenger’s air bag is deactivatedalways check warning light F on thecluster to make sure that it has actually been
deactivated.
– Carefully follow the instructions provided with the child’s seat, which the supplieris obliged to attach. Keep them in the car
together with the documents and this booklet. Do not use used seats without the instructions for use.
– Always pull the tape to check that belts
are buckled.

– During the journey, do not allow thechild to stay in abnormal positions or release
the belts.
– Do not carry children in your arms, noteven small babies. No-one, however strong,
can keep hold od them in a crash.
– In the case of accidents, replace thechild’s seat with a new one.

Never place cradle child’sseats facing backwards onthe front passenger seat ofcars fitted with passenger’s air bag
since the air bag activation could
cause serious injuries, even mortal.
You are advised to carry children
always on the rear seat, as this is
the most protected position in thecase of a crash.

PRESETTING FOR
MOUNTING“ISOFIX TYPE” CHILDRESTRAINT SYSTEM
The rear seat of your car is preset for
mounting the Isofix type child restraint system, a new European standardised systemfor carrying children safely. Isofix type child
restraint system is an additional option that
does not prevent from using traditional child
restraint systems. Isofix type child restraint
system covers three weight groups: 0, 0+
and 1.
Due to its different anchoring system, theIsofix child’ seat shall be anchored just using the metal brackets (A-fig. 47) set between rear seat back and cushion.

A0A0671b

Alfawiki.nl

36

fig. 47

Since sizes are different, on the rear seats
it is possible to install just two traditionalchild’s seats, or two Isofix type seats. On
the front passenger seat it is only possible
to mount traditional child’s seats.
Only Isofix type child restraint systems designed and tested for this car must be used.

MOUNTING THE ISOFIX TYPE
CHILD’S SEATGroups 0 and 0+
For children of the 0 and 0+ group (babies up to 13 Kg), the child’s seat is facing
backwards and the child is restrained by thechild’s seat belts(D-fig. 48).

– push the child restraint system until hearing the locking clicks;– check proper locking by moving thechild’s seat with force: the built-in safetymechanism actually inhibits proper couplingwith only one coupling locked.

As the child grows, passing to weight group
1, the child’s seat shall be fitted facing forwards.

A0A0663b

For proper mounting proceed as follows:– check whether the release lever (B) is
at rest position (inward);
Mount the child restraint
system only with the car
stationary. The Isofix child
restraint system is properly anchored to the mounting brackets
when clicks are heard. In any case,keep to the installation instructions
that must be provided by the child
restraint system Manufacturer.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

It is actually possible to mount both thetraditional restraint system and the Isofix
one, e.g. the traditional one on the left andthe Isofix type seat on the right.

– find the presetting brackets (A), thenposition the child restraint system with thefastening devices (C) aligned with the brackets;

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 48

37

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARGroup 1
For proper mounting proceed as follows:– check whether the release lever (Bfig. 49) is at rest position (inward);

With this configuration, the child is secured
also by the car seat belts and by the upper
belts. To apply car seat belts to child’s seatrefer to the child’s seat handbook.

– find the presetting brackets (A), thenposition the child restraint system with fastening devices (C) aligned with the brackets;

AIR BAG
The car is fitted with front air bags for thedriver and for the passenger (side bags - window bags).
FRONT AIR BAGS

– push the child restraint system until hearing the locking clicks;

A0A0664b– check proper locking by moving thechild’s seat with force: the built-in safetymechanism actually inhibits improper coupling with only one coupling locked.

The front air bag (driver’s and passenger’s)has been designed to protect the occupantsin the event of head-on crashes of mediumhigh severity by placing the cushion between
the occupant and the steering wheel or dashboard.
Front air bags are designed to protect the
car occupants in front crashes and therefore
non-activation in other types of collisions(side collisions, rear-end shunts, roll-overs,
etc...) is not a system malfunction.
In the case of a crash, an electronic control unit, when necessary, triggers inflationof the cushion.
The cushion inflates instantaneously, setting itself between the body of the front occupants and the structures that could cause
injury. The cushion then deflates immediately afterwards.

Alfawiki.nl

38

fig. 49

In the event of a crash a person that is notwearing the seat belt moves forwards andmay come into contact with the cushion
while it is still opening. Under these circumstances the protection offered by thecushion is reduced.
Front air bags may not be triggered in thefollowing conditions:– collisions against highly deformable objects which do not concern the car front surface (for example the bumper crashingagainst the guard rail);– wedging under other cars or protective
barriers (for example under a lorry or guardrail);
as they do not offer any more protection
than the seat belts and therefore activation
would be inappropriate. Therefore the failure to be triggered does not mean that thesystem is not working properly.

Do not apply stickers orother objects on the steering wheel and on the passenger’s air bag cover. Do not put
objects on the dashboard on thepassenger’s side (e.g. cell phones)
because they may interfere withthe correct passenger’s air bag
opening and seriously injure the occupants of the car.

DRIVER’S FRONT AIR BAG
It consists of an instant-inflating cushion
contained in a special recess in the centre of
the steering wheel (fig. 50).

The driver’s and passenger’s front air bag
has been designed to improve the protection of a person wearing a seat belt.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

The front air bag (driver’s and passenger’s)does not replace but is complementary to
the use of belts, which should always beworn, as specified by law in Europe andmost non-European countries.

Its volume at maximum inflation fills mostof the space between the steering wheel
and the driver and between the dashboard
and the passenger.
In the event of minor side crashes (forwhich the restraining action of the seat belts
is sufficient), the air bags are not deployed.
Also in this case it is of vital importance towear the seat belts since in case of sidecrash they guarantee proper positioning of
the occupant.

A0A0613b

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 50

39

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

PASSENGER’SFRONT AIRBAG
It consists of an instant-inflating cushion
contained in a special recess in the dashboard; its volume is bigger than the driver’s
one (fig. 51).
Never place cradle child’sseats facing backwards onthe front passenger seat ofcars fitted with passenger’s air bag
since the air bag activation could
cause serious injuries, even mortal.
You are advised to carry children
always on the rear seat, as this is
the most protected position in thecase of a crash.

SERIOUS DANGERChildren may placedon the front seat ofcars fitted with passenger’s air bag
deactivation. In this case, it is absolutely necessary to check thewarning light F on the instrument panel to make sure that deactivation has actually took place(see paragraph “Front passenger
air bag”). The front passenger’s
seat shall be adjusted in the mostbackward position to prevent any
contact between child’s seat anddashboard.

MANUAL DEACTIVATION OF
PASSENGER’S FRONT AIRBAG(fig. 52)
(upon request for versions /markets where applicable)
Should it be absolutely necessary to carry a child on the front seat, the passenger’s
font air bag can be deactivated.
Deactivation/reactivation takes place withignition key at STOP, and operating it in
the special key switch set in the glovebox.

A0A0392b

A0A0392b

Alfawiki.nl

40

fig. 51

fig. 52

IMPORTANT Operate the switch only
when the engine is not running and the ignition key is removed.
The key-operated switch has two positions:– passenger’s front airbag activated (ONposition P): warning light F on instrument cluster off; it is absolutely prohibitedto carry a child on the front seat.

SIDE AIR BAGSWINDOW BAG (fig. 54)(SIDE BAG - WINDOW BAG)

The window bag is formed of two “curtain” cushions housed in the side roof lining
covered by a special trim, which protects thehead of front and rear occupants in the eventof a side crash thanks to the wide cushion
inflation surface.

SIDE BAG (fig. 53)
The side bag is formed of an instantaneously-inflating cushion housed in the backrest of the front seat and protects the chestof occupants in case of a side crash of medium-high severity.

– passenger’s front airbag deactivated(OFF position F): warning light F on
instrument cluster on; it is possible to carrya child protected by special restraint systemon the front seat.

IMPORTANT In the event of side crash,
you can obtain the best protection by thesystem keeping a correct position on theseat, thus allowing correct window bag unfolding.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

The key can be inserted and removed inboth positions.

The warning light F on the cluster stays
on permanently until the passenger’s air bag
is reactivated.
Deactivation of the passenger’s front air
bag does not inhibit operation of the side airbag.

A0A0614b

A0A0615b

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 53

fig. 5441

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

IMPORTANT The front and/or side airbags may be activated if the car is subjected to heavy shocks or accidents that involvethe underbody area, such as for example violent bumps against steps, pavements or
fixed obstacles on the ground, falling into
big holes or bumpy roads.
IMPORTANT The triggering of air bags
releases a small amount of powder. This
powder is not harmful and does not indicate
a start of fire; also the surfaces of the deployed bag and the car interior may be covered with dusty residue: this may irritate theskin and eyes. In the event of exposure,wash with neutral soap and water.
Life and validity of pyrotechnic charge andcoil contact are indicated on the label set
near the lock of the left front door. As thisdate approaches, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to have the device replaced.

IMPORTANT Should an accident occur
in which any of the safety devices is activated, take the car to Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to have the devices activatedreplaced and to have the system checked.
All operations involving checking, repairing and replacing components concerning
the air bag must be carried out by Alfa
Romeo Authorised Services
If the car is to be demolished, Alfa Romeo
Authorised Services should be contacted beforehand to have the system deactivated. If
the car changes ownership, the new owner must be informed of the instructions foruse and of the above warnings and be given this “Owner’s Manual”.
IMPORTANT The triggering of the pretensioners, front air bags and side bags isdecided in a differentiated manner depending on the type of crash. The failure to trigger one or more of them does not necessarily indicate a system malfunction.

Alfawiki.nl

42

Never rest head, arms
and elbows on the door, on
the windows and in thewindow bag area to prevent possible injuries during the inflation
phase.

Never lean head, arms
and elbows out of the window.

If when turning the ignition
key to MAR, the warning
light ¬ does not turn on or
if it stays on when travelling there
could be a failure in safety systems; in this event air bags or pretensioners could not trigger in caseof impact or, in a minor number ofcases, they could trigger accidentally. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services immediately to havethe system checked.

Do not cover the backrestof front seats with trims orcovers that are not suitable
to be used with side bags.

Never travel with objects
on your lap, in front of
your chest or with a pipe,
pencil, etc. between your lips; injury may result in the event of the
air bag being triggered.

Always keep your handson the steering wheel rim
when driving, so that if the
air bag is triggered, it can inflate
without meeting any obstacles
which could cause serious harm toyou. Do not drive with the bodybent forwards, keep the seat backrest in the erect position and lean
your back well against it.

If the car has been stolenor an attempt to steal it
has been made, if it has
been subjected to vandals or
floods, have the air bag system
checked by Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services.

Remember that with the
key engaged and at MAR,even if the engine is notrunning, the air bags may be triggered on a stationary car if it isbumped by another moving car.
Therefore, never seat children on
the front seat even when the car is
stationary. On the other hand remember that if the key is at STOP,
no safety system (air bags or pretensioners) is triggered in theevent of an impact; in this case,failure to come into action cannot
be considered as a sign that thesystem is not working properly.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

GENERAL CAUTIONS

Alfawiki.nl

43

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

When the ignition key isturned to MAR, the warning light F (with passenger’s front air bag deactivation
switch at ON) turns on and flashes for few seconds to remind thatpassenger’s air bag will be deployed in a crash, after which it
should go off.

Never wash seat backrests with pressurised water or steam (by hand or at
automatic seat washing stations).

The front air bag is triggered for shocks greater inmagnitude than the pretensioners. For impacts between
these two thresholds, it is therefore normal that only the pretensioners are triggered.

The devices and services controlled by thelevers on the steering wheel can only be activated with the ignition key at MAR.
LEFT-HAND LEVER

Do not hook rigid objects
to the coat hooks and to
the support handles.

The air bag does not substitute the seat belts, but
only increases their effectiveness. Moreover, since the front
air bags do not come into operationin the event of front impact at low
speed, side collisions, bumps frombehind or overturning, in these circumstances the occupants would
only be protected by the seat belts
which must therefore always befastened.

Alfawiki.nl

44

STEERING WHEEL
LEVERS

The left-hand lever controls the outer lights
except for the fog lamps and rear fog
guards.
When the outer lights are switched on, thevarious controls on the dashboard are illuminated.
Only with the ignition key at PARK, regardless of the position of the knurled ring,
the sidelights and number plate lights stay on.
Position (1 or 2-fig. 60) of the levercauses the turning on only of the sidelights(front and rear), on the right or left respectively.
Lights switched off (fig. 55)
When the pointer in the knurled ring is opposite the symbol O, the outer lights are
switched off.

Main beams (fig. 58)

The sidelights are switched on by turning
the knurled ring from O to 6.

To turn the main beams on, set the knurledring to position 2 and push the lever towards the dashboard (stable position);
warning light 1 on the instrument panel
will turn on.

The 3 warning light on the instrument
cluster will come on at the same time.
Dipped-beam headlights (fig. 57)
These are switched on by turning theknurled ring from 6 to 2.

To set dipped-beams back pull the lever towards the steering wheel.

A0A0063b

A0A0065b

When the dipped beam headlights and thefog lamps are switched on, the outer light control unit (integrated in the Body Computer)works according to the following logics:– turning on the main beams, the dippedbeams turn off while the fog lamps stay on,
when restoring the starting condition atdipped beam setting;or– turning on the main beams, the fog
lamps turn off and then turn on again automatically as the main beams are switched off.
Therefore, in the event of Body Computer replacement, the outer light operating logic may be different.

fig. 55

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Sidelights (fig. 56)

fig. 57
A0A0064b

A0A0066b

A0A0067b

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 56

fig. 58

fig. 5945

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Flashing (fig. 59)
The headlights are flashed pulling the levertowards the steering wheel (instable position) regardless of the position of theknurled ring. The 1 warning light on thecluster will come on at the same time.
IMPORTANT Only the main-beam lights
are flashed. To avoid penalties follow local
regulations.
Direction indicators(fig. 60)

Regardless of the position of the knurled
ring, moving the lever to the stable position
will:

One of the warning lights (R or E) will
come on on the instrument cluster at thesame time.
The lever is returned to its position automatically and the indicators are switched off
when the steering wheel is straightened.
IMPORTANT If you wish to signal a
rapid change of direction involving only aminimal movement of the steering wheel,
the lever can be removed up or down without it clicking (unstable position). When released, the lever will return to its home position.

“Follow me home” device(fig. 61)
This function allows the illumination of thespace in front of the car for the length oftime set, and is activated with the ignition
key at STOP or removed, pulling the lefthand lever towards the steering wheel.
This function is activated pulling the lever
within 2 minutes from when the engine isturned off. At each single movement of thelever, the staying on of the dipped beams
and sidelights is extended by 30 seconds up
to a maximum of 3.5 minutes; the lights
switch off automatically after the time set.
Each time the lever is operated, the 1
warning light on the cluster turns on.

up, position (1) - engage the right-handdirection indicators.
down, position (2) - engage the left-handdirection indicators.
A0A0068b

A0A0067b

Alfawiki.nl

46

fig. 60

fig. 61

RIGHT-HAND LEVER
The right-hand lever is used to operate thewindscreen wiper-washer and rearscreen
wiper-washer. The windscreen washer also
activates the headlamp washers, if fitted.
A0A0616b

Windscreen wiper-washer“Intelligent washing” function

The lever can be moved to five different
positions, corresponding to:

Pulling the lever towards the steering
wheel (unstable position) operates the windscreen washer.

(fig. 62-63)

A - Windscreen wiper off.
B - Intermittent.
With the lever in position (B), turning thering (F), four possible intermittent speeds
are obtained:■= intermittent slow.
■■= intermittent medium.
■■■= intermittent medium-fast.
■■■■ = intermittent fast.

Keeping the lever pulled, with only one
movement it is possible to operate the washer jet and the wiper at the same time; indeed, the latter comes into action automatically if the lever is pulled for more thanhalf a second.
The wiper stops working a few strokes after releasing the lever; a further “cleaning
stroke” after a few seconds completes thewiping operation.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARThis function can be interrupted by keeping the lever pulled towards the steering
wheel for more than 2 seconds.

C - Continuous, slow.
D - Continuous, fast.
E - Fast, temporary (unstable position).
Operation in position (E) is limited to thetime the lever is held in this position. Whenthe lever is released, it returns to position(A) automatically stopping the wiper.

A0A0617b

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 62

fig. 6347

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Rain sensor (fig. 64)
The rain sensor (A), fitted only on certain versions, is an electronic device combined with the windscreen wiper which has
the purpose of automatically adjusting thenumber of wipes during intermittent operation to the intensity of the rain.

Turning the knurled ring (F-fig. 62) itis possible to increase the sensitivity of therain sensor, obtaining a quicker change fromstationary, when the windscreen is dry, tofirst continuous speed (continuous, slow).

All the other functions controlled by theright-hand lever remain unchanged.

Operating the windscreen washer with therain sensor activated (lever at position B)
the normal washing cycle is performed at
the end of which the rain sensor resumes its
normal automatic function.

The rain sensor is activated automaticallymoving the right-hand lever to position (Bfig. 62) and it has a range of adjustmentthat gradually varies between wiper stationary (no wiping) when the windscreen isdry, to wiper at first continuous speed (continuous, slow) with heavy rain.

Turning the ignition key to STOP the rain
sensor is deactivated and the next time theengine is started (MAR position) it will not
be reactivated even if the lever has remainedin position (B). In this case to activate therain sensor, simply move the lever to (A)or (C) and then back to (B).
When the rain sensor is reactivated in thisway, the wiper performs at least one stroke,even if the windscreen is dry, to indicate thatreactivation has occurred.

A0A0331b

The rain sensor is located behind the innerrear-view mirror in contact with the windscreen and inside the area cleaned by thewiper and it controls an electronic control
unit which in turn controls the wiper motor.

Alfawiki.nl

48

fig. 64At each start, the rain sensor automaticallystabilises at a temperature of about 40°C
to eliminate any condensation from the control surface and prevent the formation of ice.
The rain sensor is able to detect and automatically adapt to the presence of the following particular conditions which requiredifferent sensitivity:– impurities on the control surface (salt,
dirt, etc.);– streaks of water caused by worn wiper
blades;– difference between day and night (thehuman eye is more disturbed during thenight by the wet glass surface).

CRUISE CONTROL

These come into operation when the windscreen washer is turned on with thedipped/main beam headlights on.

GENERAL– pressing the clutch pedal;

The speed regulator (CRUISE CONTROL), with electronic control, makes it
possible to drive the car at the required
speed without pressing the accelerator pedal. This reduces driving fatigue during long
journeys because the speed memorised is
automatically maintained.

– if the ASR, MSR or ESP system cuts in;

IMPORTANT On certain versions when
the headlamp washer is operating, the climate control system automatically engages
inside air re-circulation, to prevent the smellof liquid detergent from entering the passenger compartment.

The device is disengaged automatically in
any of the following cases:– pressing the brake pedal;

IMPORTANT The device can only be engaged at speeds between 30 and 190 km/h.

– with Selespeed transmission if a gear ischanged;– inadvertently moving the Selespeed
gear control lever to N.
CONTROLS (fig. 66)

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Headlamp washers (fig. 65)

Cruise Control is controlled by the
ON/OFF knurled ring (A), by the +/–ring (B) and by the RES button (C).
Ring (A) has two positions:– OFF in this position the device is deactivated;

A0A0704b

Cruise Control must be activated only when theroute and traffic allow a
constant speed for a sufficiently
long distance completely safely.

A0A0077b

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 65

fig. 66

49

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR– ON is the normal operating position of
the device. When the ring (A) is in thisposition, the warning light Ü on the instrument cluster turns on.
Ring (B) serves for memorising and maintaining the car sped or for increasing or lowering the speed memorised.
Turn the ring (B) to (+) to memorise thespeed reached or increase the speed memorised.
Turn the ring (B) to (–) to lower the speed
memorised.

TO MEMORISE
THE SPEEDThe car will continue to travel at the memorised constant speed until one of the following conditions takes place:

TO RESET THE
MEMORISED SPEED
If the device has been disengaged for example pressing the brake or clutch pedal,
the memorised speed can be reset as follows:– accelerate gradually until reaching a
speed approaching the one memorised;– engage the gear selected at the timeof speed memorising (4th, 5th or 6th
speed);– pressing the brake pedal;– press the RES button (C).

Move the ring (A) to ON and take the car
to the required speed normally. Turn the ring(B) to (+) for at least three seconds, thenrelease it. The car speed is memorised and
it is therefore possible to release the accelerator pedal.

Each time the ring is actuated (B) the speed
increases or lowers by about 1.5 km/h.

– pressing the clutch pedal;

Keeping the ring turned the speed changes
continuously. The new speed reached will
be maintained automatically.

– with Selespeed transmission if a gear ischanged;The RES button (C) resets the memorised
speed.

– inadvertent movement of the Selespeed
gear control lever to position N.

IMPORTANT Turning the ignition key to
STOP or the ring (A) to OFF, the speed
memorised is cleared and the system isswitched off.

IMPORTANT In the case of need (whenovertaking for instance) acceleration is possible simply pressing the accelerator pedal;
later, releasing the accelerator pedal, the car
will return to the speed memorised previously.

– if the ASR, MSR or ESP system cuts in;

Alfawiki.nl

50

TO INCREASE THE
MEMORISED SPEED
The speed memorised can be increasedin two ways:
1) pressing the accelerator and then memorising the new speed reached (turning thering to (B) for more than three seconds);or2) momentaneously turning the ring (B)to (+): each pulse of the ring will correspondto a slight increase in speed (about 1.5km/h) while pressing continuously will correspond to a continuous speed increase. Releasing the ring (B) the new speed will bememorised automatically.

TO RESET THE MEMORISED
SPEED

The speed memorised can be reduced in
two ways:

The memorised speed is automatically reset turning off the engine or moving the ring(A) to OFF.

1) disengaging the device (for instancepressing the brake pedal) and then memorising the new speed (turning the ring (B)to (+) for at least three seconds);
2) keeping the ring pressed (B) at (–)
until reaching the new speed which will bememorised automatically.

When travelling with thecruise control on, do not
move the gearshift lever toneutral and do not move the Selespeed selector to N.

It is advisable to engage the cruise control
only when the conditions of the traffic orroads so permit under completely safe conditions, i.e.: straight and dry roads, dual carriage ways or motorways, flowing traffic andsmooth road surface. Do not engage the device in town or in heavy traffic conditions.

Cruise control may only
be engaged at speeds between 30 and 190 km/h.

The device may only be engaged in in 4th,
5th or 6th gear, depending on the speedof the car. Travelling downhill with the device engaged the car speed may increase
more than the memorised one, due to thechange in the engine load.

If the device is faulty or
not working, turn the ring(A) to OFF and contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services after checking that the protection
fuse is intact.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

TO REDUCE THE
MEMORISED SPEED

The ring (A) may be left constantly at ON
without damaging the device. You are, however, advised to switch the device off when
not in use, turning the ring to OFF, to avoid
memorising speeds by accident.

Alfawiki.nl

51

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARDASHBOARD(For right-hand drive versions see dashboard and instruments in the dedicated paragraph at the end of the manual)

A0A0748bfig. 67
1. Adjustable side air vents - 2. Fixed side window air vents - 3. External lights control lever - 4. Instrument panel - 5. Tailgate release button - 6. Cards holder(for versions/markets where applicable) - 7. Sound system (for versions/markets where applicable) - 8. Adjustable central air vents - 9. Upper fixed vent - 10.
Glass/can holder (for versions/markets where applicable) - 11. Front fog light button - 12. Hazard light switch - 13. Rear fog light button - 14. front passenger’s air bag - 15. Glovebox - 16. Door locking button - 17. Heating/ventilation/climate controls - 18. Cigar lighter/ashtray housing lid - 19. Temperature sensor - 20. Windscreen wiper stalk - 21. Ignition key and ignition switch - 22. Horn - 23. Steering wheel locking/release lever - 24. Driver’s air bag - 25. Set ofcontrols - 26. Bonnet opening lever.

Alfawiki.nl

52

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

INSTRUMENT PANEL
A. Fuel level gauge with reserve warning
light - B. Engine coolant fluid temperaturegauge with maximum temperature warning
light - C. Speedometer - D. Odometer display (mileage recorder, trip meter with headlamp position display) - E. Reconfigurable
multifunction display - F. Rev counter
NOTE On JTDM versions the scale bottom
is at 6000 revs.
A0A0760b

fig. 68 - petrol versions

A. Fuel level gauge with reserve warning
light - B. Engine coolant fluid temperaturegauge with maximum temperature warning
light - C. Speedometer - D. Odometer display (mileage recorder, trip meter with headlamp position display) - E. Reconfigurable
multifunction display - F. Rev counter

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 69 - BlackLine petrol versions

A0A0749b

53

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

A. Fuel level gauge with reserve warning
light - B. Engine coolant fluid temperaturegauge with maximum temperature warning
light - C. Speedometer - D. Odometer display (mileage recorder, trip meter with headlamp position display) - E. Reconfigurable
multifunction display - F. Rev counter

A0A0759bfig. 70 - Q2 diesel version

A. Fuel level gauge with reserve warning
light - B. Engine coolant fluid temperaturegauge with maximum temperature warning
light - C. Speedometer - D. Odometer display (mileage recorder, trip meter with headlamp position display) - E. Reconfigurable
multifunction display - F. Rev counter

54

fig. 71 - 2.0 JTS Selespeed versions

Alfawiki.nl

A0A0761b

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

A. Fuel level gauge with reserve warning
light - B. Engine coolant fluid temperaturegauge with maximum temperature warning
light - C. Speedometer - D. Odometer display (mileage recorder, trip meter with headlamp position display) - E. Reconfigurable
multifunction display - F. Rev counter

A0A0752bfig. 71a - 2.0 JTS Selespeed Black Line version

A. Fuel level gauge with reserve warning
light - B. Engine coolant fluid temperaturegauge with maximum temperature warning
light - C. Speedometer - D. Odometer display (mileage recorder, trip meter with headlamp position display) - E. Reconfigurable
multifunction display - F. Rev counter

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 71b - 3.2 V6 version

A0A0746b

55

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

SPEEDOMETER(SPEED INDICATOR)
The gauge (A-fig. 72) indicates the car
speed.
ODOMETER
Odometer display (B-fig. 72) with double meter (total and trip) and headlamp position display.
The display shows:To reset the trip meter, keep button (Afig. 73) on the plate at the side of thesteering column pressed for a few seconds.
IMPORTANT If the battery is disconnected the trip meter reading is not stored.
REV COUNTER (fig. 74)
The danger zone (red, or white on certain
versions) indicates excessive high engine
speed. Do not drive for long periods with thepointer in this area.

IMPORTANT The electronic injection control system gradually shuts off the flow of fuel when the engine is “over-revving” resulting
in a gradual loss of engine power.
When the engine is idling, the rev countermay indicate a gradual or sudden highering of
the speed, this is normal as it takes place during normal operation, for example when engaging the climate control system or the fan.
In particular a slow change in the speed preserves the battery charge.

– the mileage on the first line (6 figures)– the trip meter on the second line (4 figures)– aside the position of the headlight aiming device.

A0A1104b

A0A0756b

A0A0757b

Alfawiki.nl

56

fig. 72

fig. 73

fig. 74

This shows the amount of fuel left in thefuel tank.
0 - tank empty.
1 - tank full (see the indications given inparagraph “At the filling station").
The warning light K (A-fig. 76) turns on
to indicate that approx. 7 litres of fuel areleft in the tank.
IMPORTANT The pointer can reach the
red area also for a sum of unfavourable conditions, i.e.: slow speed, uphill, fully laden
or towing a trailer with hot outside temperature.
IMPORTANT Refuelling shall always be
performed with engine off and ignition key at
STOP. If the engine is off but the key is atMAR, a wrong fuel level could temporarily
be indicated. This is due to the internal system control logic and cannot be considered asa system malfunctioning.

ENGINE COOLANT FLUIDTEMPERATURE GAUGE WITH
MAXIMUM TEMPERATUREWARNING LIGHT
This shows the temperature of the engine
coolant fluid and begins when the fluid temperature exceeds approx. 50°C.
Normally the pointer should be towards
the middle of the scale. If the pointer reaches the higher temperatures of the scale (redsection, or white on certain versions) the request for car performance should be decreased.

IMPORTANT The temperature of the engine coolant may rise towards the maximum
values (red section, or white on certain versions) when the car is driven at low speeds,
especially when the ambient air temperature is high. In this case it is advisable tostop the car and switch off the engine fora few minutes, after which the journey canbe resumed, preferably at a higher speed.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

FUEL LEVEL GAUGE WITHRESERVE INDICATOR

The turning on of the u (B-fig. 76)
warning light (on some versions together
with the message shown on the reconfigurable multifunction display) indicates thatthe coolant fluid temperature is too high;in this case, stop the engine and contact
Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.
A0A0758b

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 7657

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY (where fitted)
The digital multifunction display shows the following: clock, outside temperature, buzzer setting (buzzer on/off), rheostat (light adjustment),
condition of the inertial fuel cut-off switch (FPS on).
CONTROL BUTTONS (fig. 75)
To make use of the information the digital display (with the ignition key at MAR) is able to give, you should firstly familiarise with the control buttons on the plate at the side of the steering column, using them as described in the following paragraphs. Before doing anything at all,you are advised to read this chapter in full.

A0A1105b

To decrease the value displayed
Press for less than 1 second (pulse), indicated with Q in the following descriptions, to access the various adjustments

Press for more than 2 seconds, indicated with R in the following descriptions,
to confirm the choice required and return to the previous display
fig. 75

To decrease the value displayed

Alfawiki.nl

58

Adjusting the minutes

BUZZER (fig. 77-78)

Adjusting the hours

Press the MODE button twice in Q, theminutes will flash. Set the minutes required
using buttons ▲ or ▼.

The buzzer which accompanies the controls may be activated (ON) or deactivated(OFF); proceed as follows:

Every press on the button will increase by
one unit.

Press the MODE button 3 times in Q,
then use buttons ▲ or ▼, to turn the buzzer
on or off.

Press the MODE button in Q, the hours
will flash. Set the hour required using buttons▲ or ▼.
Every press on the button will increase by
one unit.
Keeping the button pressed obtains automatic fast increase or decrease.
When you are near the value required, release the control and complete adjustment
with single presses.
Then press the MODE button in R to
store.

clock and outside temperature
display

A0A0009b

Keeping the button pressed obtains automatic fast increase or decrease.
When you are near the value required, release the control and complete adjustment
with single presses.

Then press the MODE button in R to
store the condition chosen.

Then press the MODE button in R to
store.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

CLOCK (fig. 76)

OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE (fig. 76)
Outside temperature can be viewed on thedisplay lower side, under the hour indication. When the outside temperature is below or 3° C, the indicator starts flashing
together with the buzzer, to warn the driverabout the possible presence of ice on theroad. The acoustic signal lasts about 2 seconds, while the outside temperature indicator flashes for about 10 seconds. The signal of possible presence of ice on the roadis repeated only if the outside temperature
is over 6° C and then reaches again 3° C.

buzzer activated display (ON)

A0A0083b

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 76

fig. 7759

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

LIGHT RHEOSTAT (fig. 79-80)
This function makes it possible to adjust
the lighting (dimming/increasing) of the instrument cluster, odometer display (total
and trip meter, headlamp aiming device display) of the clock/outside temperature display and of the radio display.
To access the light rheostat, open themenu by pressing button MODE, select“ILLU” (first option displayed) by pressing
again button MODE and then set the required level using buttons ▲/▼.
“ILLU” function is available when at least
the side/taillights are on.

ing is turned off with the exception of the
speedometer.

INERTIAL FUEL CUT-OFF
SWITCH ON DISPLAY (fig. 81)

Keeping button ▲ pressed (on the plateat the side of the steering column) for morethan 4 seconds the complete instrument
cluster lighting is turned on again.

The display shown appears automaticallywhen the inertial fuel cut-off switch cuts in,following a crash of a certain magnitude.

display
with minimum brightness

IMPORTANT See the description in theControls paragraph under the Inertial fuelcut-off switch.

A0A0012b

The switch shuts off the supply of fuel.

Partial lighting
Keeping button ▼ pressed (on the plateat the side of the steering column) for morethan 4 seconds the instrument cluster light-

fig. 79buzzer deactivated display (OFF)display
with maximum brightness

A0A0014b

A0A0013b

inertial fuel cut-off switch
on display

Alfawiki.nl

60

fig. 78

fig. 80

fig. 81

A0A0007b

The reconfigurable multifunction display isable to display all the useful and necessary
information when driving, in particular:

INFORMATION ABOUTCAR CONDITIONCONTROL BUTTONS fig. 83❒ Trip computer;

MODE

INFORMATION ON
STANDARD SCREEN❒ Lighting adjustment (rheostat);Press the button briefly: to confirm
the selected option and/or to go to nextscreen;❒ Display of failure messages with corresponding symbol;❒ Time (A-fig. 82);

❒ Display of warning messages with corresponding symbol (e.g.: possible iceon road);❒ Outside temperature (B);❒ Date (C).

❒ Gear selected (2.0 T.SPARK Selespeed
versions only);

Press the button for long: to confirm the selected option and to go back toprevious screen;▲/▼ to scroll the “Setup Menu” upwards/downwards or to increase/decrease
the value displayed.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

RECONFIGURABLE MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY❒ Engine oil level (JTDM versions only).

A0A9129g

A0A0022m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 82

fig. 83

61

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR“SETUP MENU”
The “Setup Menu” shall be used to perform the adjustments and/or settings described on the following pages, by pressing button MODEand ▲/▼ (see fig. 83). Press briefly button MODE to display the setup menu. The menu consists of a set of functions arranged in a “circular fashion” fig. 84.
EnglishDeutschEspãnol

Italiano

Français

MENU OFFDIMMERSPEEDSERVICE

Nederlands

BUZZERQ

TRIP BUNITSTIMELANGUAGE
DATEQ

DST (SUMMER TIME)NAVIGATIONTELEPHONE

fig. 84

62

MODE 12/24
RADIO

Day
Year

Month

Press brifely button MODE to open the menu. To surf the menu, press buttons ▲ or ▼. For safety reasons, when the car is running, it is
Alfawiki.nl
possible to access only the reduced menu (for setting “DIMMER” and “SPEED” values). When the car is stationary access to the whole menu
is enabled.

Turning the ignition key to MAR the display shows the engine oil level for a few seconds. During this phase, to clear the display
and move to next screen, press briefly button MODE.

Fig. 86 refers to the display with an oillevel below the preset minimum. In this condition the bars are all empty.

Fig. 87 refers to the display with an oillevel above the preset maximum. In this condition the bars are all full.

IMPORTANT In this case the correct engine oil level should be restored as soon as
possible, see “Checking levels” in section“Car maintenance”.

IMPORTANT In this case, contact Alfa
Romeo Authorised Services who will restore
the correct engine oil level.

IMPORTANT To make sure that the engine oil level displayed is correct, carry out
the check with the car on level ground.
Fig. 85 refers to the correct engine oillevel display. As the oil level gradually falls,
the full bars go off leaving room for the empty ones.

A0A9101g

A0A9102g

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Engine oil level check(JTD versions)

A0A9103g

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 85

fig. 86

fig. 8763

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

DIMMERSPEED

To clear setting:With this function it is possible to adjust
the lighting (dimming/brightening) of the
instrument cluster, mileage recorder (total,
trip meter), headlight aiming display, radio
display, radio navigator display (where provided) and two-zone climate control (where
provided).

With this function it is possible to set the
car speed limit (km/h or mph), when thislimit is exceeded the driver is immediately
alerted (see section “Warning lights and messages”).

❒ press briefly button MODE: the display
will show the word OFF;

Proceed as follows:❒ press briefly button MODE: the display
will show a graduated scale;❒ press buttons ▲/▼ to adjust as required.
Partial lighting
Keeping button (▼) pressed for more than 4seconds, the rev counter lighting is turned off.
Keeping button (▲) pressed for more than
4 seconds, the complete instrument cluster
lighting is turned on again.
IMPORTANT When external lights are
switched on dimming of the brightness canbe perceived. In the event of any faults,
lighting adjustment (rheostat) is not possible and the display is shown at its maximum
brightness.

To set the speed limit, proceed as follows:❒ press briefly button MODE: the display
will show the word ON;❒ press briefly button MODE then, usebuttons ▲/▼ to set the required speed(during setting the value flashes).
❒ press briefly button MODE to go backto the menu screen or press the button
for long to go back to the standard
screen.
IMPORTANT The possible setting is between 30 and 250 km/h or between 20
and 150 mph depending on the unit set previously (see paragraph “UNITS” describedlater). Every press of the button ▲/▼ increases or decreases by one unit. Keeping
button ▲/▼ pressed, obtain automatic fast
increase/decrease. When you are near therequired setting release the button and complete adjustment with single presses.

Alfawiki.nl

64❒ press button (▼): the display will show
the word OFF;❒ press briefly button MODE to go backto the menu screen or press the button
for long to go back to the standard
screen.

TIME

DATE

With this option it is possible to turn
(ON/OFF) the TRIP B function (partial
trip) which displays the figures relating to
AVERAGE CONSUMPTION B, AVERAGE
SPEED B, TRAVEL TIME B, and TRAVEL DISTANCE B during a “partial mission” contained in the “general mission” (for further
information see “Trip Computer”).

This function enables to set the clock(hours - minutes).

This function enables to update the date(day - month - year).

Proceed as follows:

To correct the date proceed as follows:❒ press briefly button MODE: the display
will show the hour;❒ press briefly button MODE: the display
will show the date;❒ press buttons ▲/▼ for setting;❒ press buttons ▲/▼ for setting the day;❒ press briefly button MODE to set minutes (pressing the button for long will
return to standard screen);❒ press briefly button MODE for setting
the month (or press the button for longto go back to standard screen);❒ press buttons ▲/▼ for setting;❒ press buttons ▲/▼ for setting;❒ press briefly button MODE to go backto the menu screen or press the button
for long to go back to the standard
screen.

❒ press briefly button MODE for setting
the year (or press the button for longto go back to standard screen);

IMPORTANT Every press of the button▲/▼ increases or decreases by one unit.
Keeping button ▲/▼ pressed, obtain automatic fast increase/decrease. When you
are near the required setting release the button and complete adjustment with single
presses.

❒ press briefly button MODE to go backto the menu screen or press the button
for long to go back to the standard
screen.

For activation/deactivation, proceed as follows:❒ press briefly button MODE: the display
will show the word ON;❒ use buttons ▲/▼ to select on or off;
❒ press briefly button MODE to go backto the menu screen or press the button
for long to go back to the standard
screen.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

TRIP B❒ press buttons ▲/▼ for setting;

Alfawiki.nl

65

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

DST (SUMMER TIME)

MODE 12/24

TELEPHONE

This option enables to turn ON/OFF thesummer time function (which corresponds
to + 1 hour in relation to the daylight time).

This option enables to set the clock in the
12h or 24h mode.
To adjust, proceed as follows:❒ press briefly button MODE: the display
will show 12h;
❒ press buttons ▲/▼ for setting (12hor 24h);❒ press briefly button MODE to go backto the menu screen or press the button
for long to go back to the standard
screen.

This option enables to activate/deactivate(ON/OFF) displaying of the name (if in
the list) and phone number of the caller on
the instrument panel display.

For activation/deactivation, proceed as follows:❒ press briefly button MODE: the display
will show the word ON;❒ use buttons ▲/▼ to select on or off;
❒ press briefly button MODE to go backto the menu screen or press the button
for long to go back to the standard
screen.
Selecting and activating the “DST ON”
function, the display switches from daylighttime to summer time and vice versa, withno need to intervene manually on the“TIME” function described previously.

66

RADIO
This option enables to activate/deactivate(ON/OFF) the repetition of the information displayed by the radio front panel on
the instrument panel display.
For activation/deactivation, proceed as follows:❒ press briefly button MODE: the display
will show the word ON;❒ use buttons ▲/▼ to select on or off;
❒ press briefly button MODE to go backto the menu screen or press the button
for long to go back to the standard screen.
Selecting and activating “RADIO DISPLAY ON”, when turning the radio on, thedisplay repeatsAlfawiki.nl
the information displayed by
the radio front panel.

For activation/deactivation, proceed as follows:❒ press briefly button MODE: the display
will show the word ON;❒ use buttons ▲/▼ to select on or off;
❒ press briefly button MODE to go backto the menu screen or press the button
for long to go back to the standard
screen.
Selecting and activating “TELEPHONEDISPLAY ON”, when a phone call arrives,the display shows the name (if in the list)
and the phone number of the caller.

LANGUAGE

UNITS

This option enables, during use of the radionavigator, to activate/deactivate(ON/OFF) the repetition of the pictograms
displayed by the radionavigator on the instrument panel display.

This option enables to select the language
required for the texts shown on the display.

This option enables to set the units for distance covered (km or mi), fuel consumption(l/100 km, km/l or mpg) and temperature (°C or °F).

For activation/deactivation, proceed as follows:❒ press briefly button MODE: the display
will show the word ON;❒ use buttons ▲/▼ to select on or off;
❒ press briefly button MODE to go backto the menu screen or press the button
for long to go back to the standard
screen.

To set the required language proceed asfollows:❒ press briefly button MODE: the display
will show the previously set “language”;❒ press buttons ▲/▼ for setting;❒ press briefly button MODE to go backto the menu screen or press the button
for long to go back to the standard
screen.

To set the required unit proceed as follows:❒ press briefly button MODE: the display
will show “km” or “mi” (according toprevious setting);❒ press buttons ▲/▼ for setting;❒ press briefly button MODE to selectthe temperature unit (or press the button for long to go back to the standard
screen): the display will show °C or °F(according to previous setting);

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

NAVIGATION❒ press buttons ▲/▼ for setting;Selecting and activating “NAVIGATIONDISPLAY ON”, the instrument panel display shows the information displayed by theradionavigator display.

Alfawiki.nl

67

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR❒ press briefly button MODE to selectthe consumption unit (or press the button for long to go back to the standard
screen);❒ If the distance unit set is “km”, the display will show “l/100km” or“km/l”: press buttons ▲/▼ for setting. If the distance unit set is “mi”, thedisplay will show “mpg”;❒ press briefly button MODE to go backto the menu screen or press the button
for long to go back to the standard
screen.
IMPORTANT The temperature unit (°Cor °F) set on the display is also shown on
the displays of the two-zone climate control(where provided) and radionavigator (where
provided).

BUZZERSERVICEThis option enables to adjust the volumeof the roger-beep accompanying the activation of the car buttons and any failure/warning indication shown on the display.

Through this function it is possible to display information connected to proper car servicing.

To adjust the volume proceed as follows:❒ press briefly button MODE: the display
will show the previously set volume“level”;

To consult this function, proceed as follows:❒ press briefly button MODE: service in“km” or “mi” according to previous
setting, will be displayed (see paragraph “UNITS”);❒ press buttons ▲/▼ for setting;❒ press buttons ▲/▼ to display the required service info;❒ press briefly button MODE to go backto the menu screen or press the button
for long to go back to the standard
screen.

❒ press briefly button MODE to go backto the menu screen or press the button
for long to go back to the standard
screen.

IMPORTANT In the buzzer OFF condition, any buzzer failure warnings are maintained.

IMPORTANT The Service Schedule includes car maintenance every 20,000 km;
this is shown automatically, with the ignition key to MAR, starting from 2,000 km(or mi) from this deadline and it will be displayed again every 200 km. The display can
only be reset by Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
MENU OFF
Selecting this option will bring back to standard screen.

Alfawiki.nl

68

General features
The “Trip computer” displays information relating to the operating status of the car. This function comprises the GENERAL TRIP, concerning
the “complete mission” of the car (journey) and TRIP B, concerning the partial mission of the car; this latter function (as shown in the following diagram) is “contained” within the complete mission.
Both functions are resettable (reset - start of new mission).

End of complete mission
Start of new mission
Reset GENERAL TRIP

End of complete mission
Start of new mission
Reset GENERAL TRIP˙˙

GENERAL TRIP

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

TRIP COMPUTER

Reset TRIP B

˙

TRIP B˙

End of partial mission
Start of new partial mission

˙˙

Reset TRIP B

TRIP B˙

End of partial mission
Start of new partial mission
Reset TRIP B

˙

TRIP BEnd of partial mission
Start of new partial mission

End of partial mission
Start of new partial mission
Reset TRIP B

Alfawiki.nl

69

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

The GENERAL TRIP displays the figures relating to:❒ Average consumption

Values displayed

Range

Average consumption

This value shows the distance in km (ormi) that the car can still cover before needing fuel, assuming that driving conditions
are kept unvaried.

❒ Actual consumption

This value shows the average consumption
from the start of the new mission.

❒ Average speed

Actual consumption❒ Travel time

This value shows instant fuel consumption(this value is updated second by second). If
parking the car with engine on, the display
will show “- - - -”.

❒ Range❒ Travel Distance

Average speed❒ Average consumption B

This value shows the car average speed asa function of the overall time elapsed since
the start of the new mission.

❒ Average speed B

Travel time

TRIP B displays information concerning:❒ Travel time B❒ Travel Distance B

This value shows the time elapsed since
the start of the new mission (driving time).

❒ value lower than 50 km (or 30 mi);❒ car left parked with engine running forover 5 minutes.

Travel DistanceThis value shows the distance covered fromthe start of the new mission.
Each time the battery is connected andeach time a new mission is started (reset),
the display will show “0.0”.
IMPORTANT Lacking information, TRIPCOMPUTER values are displayed with “- - - -”.
When normal operating condition is reset, calculation of different units will restart regularly. Values displayed before the failure will not
be reset.

Alfawiki.nl

70

The display will show “- - - -“ in the following cases:

SET BUTTON

Reset can be:

This button, set on the right steering column stalk (fig. 86), shall be used (withignition key MAR), to enter the GENERAL
TRIP and TRIP B functions.

❒ “manual”: reset is performed by the driver by pressing for long button SET;
❒ “automatic”: reset is performed whenthe “travel distance” reaches 9999.9
km (or mi), when “travel time” reaches 99:59 (99 hours and 59 minutes)
or after disconnecting and then reconnecting the battery.

Button SET shall also be used to reset the
GENERAL TRIP and TRIP B functions to starta new mission:- short push: to go to next screen;- long push: to reset and then start a
new mission.

Start of journey procedure(reset)With ignition key at MAR, press and keep
button SET pressed for over 2 seconds toreset.
The reset operation (button SET pressedfor over 2 seconds) in the presence of thescreens concerning the GENERAL TRIP makes
it possible to reset also the TRIP B.
The reset operation (button SET pressedfor over 2 seconds) in the presence of thescreens concerning only the TRIP B makes
it possible to reset only the information associated with this function.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

New mission (reset)

IMPORTANT RANGE and ACTUAL CONSUMPTION information cannot be reset.

A0A0021b

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 8671

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWARNING LIGHTSAND MESSAGES

Handbrake on
The warning light turns on when the handbrake is on.

IMPORTANT The presence of warning
lights depends on the type of engine andequipment with which the car is fitted.

x

LOW BRAKE FLUIDLEVEL (red)HANDBRAKE
ON (red)Turning the ignition key to MAR the warning light turns on, but it should go off afterfew seconds.

Turning the ignition key to MAR the warning light turns on, but it should go off afterfew seconds.
If the warning light turns
on when travelling, checkthat the handbrake is notengaged. If the warning light stays
on with handbrake disengaged,
stop the car immediately and contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

Low brake fluid level
The warning light turns on (together withmessage + symbol on the display) when thelevel of the brake fluid in the reservoir falls
below the minimum level, due to possible
leak in the circuit.

Alfawiki.nl

72u

HIGH ENGINECOOLANTTEMPERATURE (red)The warning light turns on (together withmessage + symbol on the display) when theengine is overheated: if the warning lightcomes on when driving, stop the car leaving the engine on and slightly accelerated
to further activate the circulation of thecoolant fluid.
If the warning light does not turn off within the next 2 or 3 minutes, stop the engine
and contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

Turning the ignition key to MAR the warning light turns on, but it should go off afterfew seconds.

v

LOW ENGINEOIL PRESSURE

Message + symbol are displayed when engine oil pressure is low.

The failure of the warning
light ¬ (warning light off)is also indicated by the
flashing for more than the normal
4 seconds of the air bag warning
light ¬.

Message + symbol are displayed when thebattery charge is low.
If message + symbol are displayed, contact immediately Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

The warning light stays on glowing steadily if there is a failure in the air bag system.

If when turning the ignition key to MAR, thewarning light ¬ does notturn on or if it stays on when travelling there could be a failure insafety systems; in this event air
bags or pretensioners could not
trigger in case of impact or, in a minor number of cases, they could
trigger accidentally. Before restarting contact Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services.

w

LOW BATTERYCHARGE

If message + symbol are
displayed when travellingstop the engine immediately and contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR¬

AIR BAG FAILURE(red)

Alfawiki.nl

73

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR<

SEAT BELTS NOTFASTENED (red)The warning light turns on glowing steadily with ignition key at MAR, when the driver’s seat belt is not fastened correctly.

´

INCOMPLETE DOORLOCKINGd

BRAKE PAD WEAR

With the brake pedal pressed, the display
will show message + symbol when front
brake pads are worn; in this case have themchanged as soon as possible.
IMPORTANT Since the car is fitted withwear sensors for the front brake pads, whenchanging them, check also the rear brakepads.

Message + symbol are displayed when
one or more doors or the bonnet are notproperly shut.

t

SELESPEED
TRANSMISSIONFAILURE(2.0 T.SPARK
Selespeed versions)

On versions with Selespeed transmission,
message + symbol are displayed when there
is a failure in the Selespeed transmission. In
the event of Selespeed transmission failure,
go as soon as possible to the nearest Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services and have thesystem checked.

Alfawiki.nl

74

U

ENGINE CONTROLSYSTEM FAILURE(EOBD) (amber)(upon request for versions/markets where applicable)
In normal conditions, turning the ignition
key to MAR, the warning light turns on,
but it should go off when the engine has
started. The initial turning on indicates thatthe warning light is working properly.
If the warning light stays on or turns onwhen travelling (together with message +symbol on the display):
glowing steadily - means a fault in the
supply/ignition system which could cause
high emissions at the exhaust, possible lackof performance, poor handling and high consumption levels. In these conditions it is possible to continue driving without however requiring heavy effort or high speed from theengine. Prolonged use of the car with thewarning light on may cause damages. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services as soon
as possible. The warning light goes off if thefault disappears, but it is however stored by
the system;

If, turning the ignition key
to MAR, the warning light
U does not turn on or if itturns on glowing steadily or flashing when travelling, contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services assoon as possible.

Y

ALFA ROMEO CODESYSTEM

Turning the key to MAR the symbol on
the display shall flash only once and thengo off. If with the ignition key at MAR, thesymbol stays on the display (together wit
the message), this indicates a possible failure (see “Alfa Romeo CODE system”).
IMPORTANT The turning on at thesame time of warning light U and symbol Y indicates a failure of the Alfa Romeo
CODE system.
If with the engine running, the display
shows message + symbol, this means thatthe car is not protected by the engine immobilising device (see “Alfa Romeo CODE
system” in this section). Contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services to have all the keys
memorised.

m

GLOW PLUG
WARMING(diesel versions)

GLOW PLUG WARMING
FAILURE (diesel versions)
Glow plug warming
Turning the ignition key to MAR, the display shows message + symbol. The symbol
will turn off when glow plugs reach the preset temperature. Start the engine immediately after the symbol turns off.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

flashing - indicates the possibility of damage to the catalyst (see “EOBD system” inthis section). If the light flashes, it is necessary to release the accelerator pedal tolower the speed of the engine until the warning light stops flashing; continue the journey
at moderate speed, trying to avoid driving
conditions that may cause further flashingand contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services
as soon as possible.

IMPORTANT With mild or hot ambient
temperature, warning light stays on for very
short time.

Alfawiki.nl

75

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Glow plug warming failure
Message + symbol are displayed when
there is a failure in the glow plug warming
system. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services as soon as possible to have the fault
eliminated.

c

WATER IN DIESEL
FUEL FILTER(diesel versions)

Message + symbol are displayed whentravelling to indicate that there is water inthe diesel fuel filter.

The presence of water inthe fuel circuit may cause
serious damage to the entire injection system and cause irregular engine operation. If message + symbol are displayed on thereconfigurable multifunction display
contact Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services as soon as possible tohave the system relieved. If theabove indications come on immediately after refuelling, water has
probably been poured into thetank: turn the engine off immediately and contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

Alfawiki.nl

76h

DIESEL PARTICULATEFILTER CLOGGED(diesel versions)(upon request forversions/markets
where applicable)

Message + symbol are displayed when the
diesel particulate filter is clogged and the driving conditions do not enable to activate automatically the reclaiming procedure.
To enable the cleaning procedure, keep the
car running until the message + symbol turnoff.

Message + symbol are displayed when theinertial fuel cut-off switch is triggered.

If after the message you
smell fuel or see leaks fromthe fuel system, do not reset the switch to avoid fire risk.

>

INEFFICIENT ABS
SYSTEM (where
provided) (amber)

Turning the ignition key to MAR the warning light turns on, but it should go off afterfew seconds.
The warning light turns on (together withmessage + symbol on the display) when thesystem is inefficient. In this case the braking system keeps its effectiveness unchanged, but without the potential offeredby the ABS system.
Caution is advisable, particularly in all cases of less than perfect grip. It is necessary
to contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services
as soon as possible.

x>

INEFFICIENT EBD
ELECTRONICBRAKING
DISTRIBUTOR (red)(amber)

The turning on at the sametime of warning lights x and >(together with message + symbol on the display)with the engine running indicates an EBD
system failure; in this case heavy braking
may cause the rear wheels to lock before
time, with the possibility of skidding.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARs

INERTIAL FUEL
CUT-OFF SWITCH

Drive with the utmost care to the nearest
Alfa Romeo Authorized Service to have thesystem checked.

Alfawiki.nl

77

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

FRONTPASSENGER’S AIRBAG DEACTIVATED(amber)(upon request forversions/markets whereapplicable)

Turning the ignition key to MAR the warning light turns on, but it should go off afterfew seconds.

Turning the ignition key to MAR, thewarning light turns on, but it should go off
after few seconds.

With passenger’s front air bags ON, turning the ignition key to MAR the warning
light turns on, but it should go off after about
4 seconds.

If the warning light does not turn off orstays on when travelling (together with message + symbol on the display), contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

The warning light turns on when the passenger’s front Air bag is deactivated.

The warning light flashes when the VDC
system cuts in.

The warning light turns on when the system is switched off. The warning light flashes when the system cuts in, to alert the driver that the system is adapting to the roadsurface grip conditions.

Fá

VDC SYSTEM(where provided)(amber)Warning light F indicates also warning light ¬failures. This is indicated byintermittent flashing, over 4 seconds, of warning light F. In thisevent warning light ¬ could not indicate safety system failures. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to have the system checked
immediately.

Alfawiki.nl

78

V

ASR (WHEEL
ANTISKID SYSTEM)(where provided)(amber)

The turning on of the warning light (together with message + symbol on the display) also indicates a failure of the ASR system. In this case contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services as soon as possible.

Turning the ignition key to MAR, thewarning light turns on, but it should go off
after few seconds.
The display will show message + symbol
when one of the following lights is failing:

K

FUEL RESERVE(amber)

The warning light turns on (on certain versions with the message on the display)when about 7 litres fuel are left in the tankand, on certain versions when the cruising
range is less than 50 km.

❒ side/taillights❒ brake lights and relevant fuse❒ rear fog lights❒ number plate lights.
The failure referring to these lights could
be: one or more blown bulbs, a blown protection fuse or an electric connection cut-off.

R

LEFT-HAND
DIRECTION
INDICATOR (green)

The warning light turns on when the direction indicator stalk is moved downwards
or, together with the right indicator, when
the hazard warning light button is pressed.

E

RIGHT-HAND
DIRECTION
INDICATOR (green)

3

SIDE/TAILLIGHTS(green)

The warning light turns on when side/taillights or low beams are turned on.

Ü

CRUISE CONTROL(where provided)(green)

The warning light turns on (on certain versions with message + symbol on the display) when turning the Cruise Control
knurled ring to ON.

1

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

W

EXTERNAL LIGHTSFAILURE(amber)

MAIN BEAMS(blue)

The warning light turns on when the main
beams or the “Follow me home” device areturned on (see the relevant paragraph).

The warning light turns on when the direction indicator stalk is moved upwards or,together with the left indicator, when thehazard warning light button is pressed.

Alfawiki.nl

79

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR√

POSSIBLE
PRESENCE
OF ICEON THE ROAD

The display shows message + symbol √and a buzzer will sound when the outside
temperature reaches or falls below 3°C towarn the driver of the possible presence of
ice on the road.

WARNING LIGHTSFAILUREThe message will be displayed when oneof the following warning lights is failing: ABS
warning light, EBD warning light, ASR warning light, VDC warning light.
ENGINE OIL
LEVEL SENSOR

The buzzer will sound for approx. 2 seconds whereas the message will stay on thedisplay for aprrox. 10 seconds then, only
the symbol will stay displayed until temperature exceeds 6°C or until the engine
is switched off.

The warning light turns on when a fault
is detected to the engine oil level sensor.
Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services assoon as possible to have the failure eliminated.

If when travelling, next to the indicationof possible ice on road, the temperature willraise above 6° C symbol √ will turn off. If
temperature falls again below 3° C a newmessage (outside temperature flashing) +symbol √ will be displayed together withthe sound of the buzzer.

SPEED LIMIT EXCEEDEDThe display will show the dedicated message + symbol and the buzzer will soundwhen the car exceeds the speed limit set
previously (see “Reconfigurable multifunction display”).

Alfawiki.nl

80

RANGE (Trip Computer)
The display will show the dedicated message + symbol when the cruising range isless than 50 km.
SCHEDULED SERVICINGThe display will show the dedicated message starting from 2000 km from the deadline planned in the Service Schedule. The
message will be repeated every 200 km
when turning the ignition key to MAR.

A0A0703b

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARHEATING AND CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM

fig. 87
1 Upper stationary vent for defrosting or demisting windscreen - 2 Upper centre adjustable vent - 3 Stationary vents for defrosting or demisting side windows - 4 Adjustable centre, swivel vents - 5 SideAlfawiki.nl
adjustable and swivel outlets - 6 Front feet area fixed vents - 7 Rear feetarea fixed vents - 8 Rear adjustable swivel outlet.

81

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

UPPER CENTRE VENTADJUSTMENT (fig. 88)

SIDE SWIVEL OUTLET
ADJUSTMENT (fig. 89)

The vent (1) has an opening/closing
control (A).

To direct the flow of air, turn the knurledring (A) and/or directly use control (B)as required.

closed.
•I == Completely
Completely open.

To adjust the air flow, use control (C):closed.
•I == Completely
Partially open.

CENTRE SWIVEL VENTADJUSTMENT (fig. 88)

To direct the flow of air, turn the knurledring (A) and/or directly use control (B)as required.
To adjust the air flow, use control (C):closed.
•I == Completely
Partially open.

II = Completely open.

Each vent (2) has a lever (B) whichmakes it possible to direct the flow of air(in the 4 directions: up/down, right/left).

REAR SWIVEL OUTLET
ADJUSTMENT(fig. 90)

II = Completely open.
D - fixed vent for defrosting or demistingside windows.

To adjust the air flow, use control (C):closed.
•I == Completely
Completely open.

A0A0085b

A0A0086b

A0A0087b

Alfawiki.nl

82

fig. 88

fig. 89

fig. 90

QUICK DEMISTING/DEFROSTING

A0A0730b

Below is a brief description of the climate control system functions.
To obtain them, set the pointer on therings of the corresponding knobs as illustrated.
For more detailed information about thesystem and how to make the best use ofit, read the instructions given in the following pages.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM

fig. 91
MAXIMUM HEATING POWER
A0A0731b

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 9283

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

A0A0732b

CONTROLS (fig. 93)
1 - Air temperature adjustment knob
2 - Fan speed adjustment knob
3 - Air distribution selector knob
4 - Air recirculation on/off button v
5 - Rearscreen heating on/off button (.

fig. 93

Alfawiki.nl

84

Turn the ring of knob (1-fig. 93) clockwise or counter-clockwise respectively tohigher or lower the temperature of the air
admitted to the passenger compartment.
FAN SPEED ADJUSTMENT
KNOB
Turning the ring of knob (2-fig. 93) it
is possible to select one of the fan speeds
to personalise the amount of air admitted
to the passenger compartment.

AIR DISTRIBUTION KNOB
Turning the knob ring (3-fig. 93), thefollowing positions are selected in sequence:
Air flow towards the upper centre,
front centre vents and from thefront and rear outlets with the possibilityof adjustment using the controls on theactual vents.

¥of air flow between the preμ Splitting
vious vents and the lower part of thepassenger compartment.
flow to the lower part of the pasw Air
senger compartment (front and rear).

of air flow between the≤ Splitting
windscreen/front side windows
and the lower part of the passenger compartment.
flow towards the windscreen
y Air
and front side windows for demisting/defrosting.
of air to allow quick demist- Flow
ing/defrosting of the windscreen
and front side windows, turning onrearscreen heating for demisting/defrosting (function called MAX-DEF).

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

AIR TEMPERATURE
ADJUSTMENT KNOB

Position 0 turns off the fan and automatically engages inside air re-circulation(shown by the lighting up of the led next
to the button 4 v) thereby shutting off
the inlet of outside air to the car.
To switch off inside air re-circulation, press
button (4) v.

Alfawiki.nl

85

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

INSIDE AIR RE-CIRCULATION
ON/OFF BUTTON
Pressing button (4-fig. 93) v activates inside air re-circulation and the led
next to the button lights up.
In this case the climate control system
directly treats the air contained in the passenger compartment, the fan is on.
To switch the air re-circulation feature off
and withdraw air from outside, press the
button again.

The inside air recirculation
system makes it possible
to reach the required“heating” or “cooling” conditions
faster. It is however inadvisable touse it on rainy/cold days as it
would considerably increase thepossibility of the windows mistinginside, especially if the manual climate control system is off.

Pressing button (5-fig. 93) ( turns
on demisting/defrosting of the rearscreen,
and if present, the door mirrors heatingcoils; simultaneously the led next to the button turns on. This function is timed andswitches off automatically after 20 minutes.
To turn off earlier, press the button again.
IMPORTANT The system automatically turns on rearscreen heating if the temperature is below 3°C.
IMPORTANT Do not apply stickers on
the inside of the rearscreen over the heating filaments to avoid damage whichmight cause it to stop working properly.

It is advisable to turn on
the inside air recirculation
system v in queues ortunnels to avoid admitting polluted air from outside. The prolonged
use of this function should however be avoided, especially with several persons on board, to avoid thepossibility of the windows mistinginside.

Alfawiki.nl

86

REARSCREEN HEATING
ON/OFFBUTTON

When cleaning the insideof the rearscreen, takecare not to damage theheating filaments.

Proceed as follows:- turn the ring of the air distribution knob
(3) to the - symbol.
The climate control activates all the functions necessary to quicken demisting/defrosting of the windscreen and side windows with timing (switching off automatically after 3 minutes), as follows:- switches off air re-circulation, if engaged;- sets the maximum air temperature;- operates the fan at a predefined speed;fig. 94
When the max demisting/defrosting function is on, the led next to the rearscreen
heating button (5) - will turn on.
IMPORTANT If the engine is not hot
enough, the function does not immediately engage the pre-established fan speed,
to restrict the inlet of air to the passenger
compartment that is not warm enough todemist the windows.

- directs the flow of air towards the windscreen and front side window vents;

After demisting/defrosting, simply use
the controls to maintain the optimum conditions of vision and comfort.

- turns on rearscreen heating and, if present, the wing mirror coils.

IMPORTANT The hotter the engine
the more effective defrosting will be.

IMPORTANT In cases of heavy damp
and/or rain and/or big differences in temperature between inside the car and outside, it is advisable to proceed as follows
to demist the windows:

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

A0A0733b

DEMISTING
AND/OR DEFROSTING THE
WINDSCREEN AND FRONTSIDE WINDOWS, REARSCREEN
AND WING MIRRORS(MAX-DEF FUNCTION) (fig. 94)- air re-circulation off, led next to button(4) v off;
- pointer of knob (2) at fan second speed
at least;- pointer of knob (3) on symbol ≤ withthe possibility of passing to position y if
more misting is noted;
To defrost/demist the rearscreen, press
button (5) (, led next to button on.

Alfawiki.nl

87

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

A0A0734b

HEATING (fig. 95)
To obtain the temperature required, proceed as follows:- temperature adjustment knob pointer(1) on the red sector as required;- air quantity adjustment knob pointer(2) on the fan speed required to personalise the amount of air admitted;

fig. 95- air distribution knob pointer (3) on therequired position.

POLLEN FILTER(for versions/markets where applicable)

To obtain the maximum heating powerproceed as follows:- knob pointer (1) as far as it will go clockwise (maximum temperature red sector);- knob pointer (2) on maximum fan
speed;- air distribution knob pointer (3) on therequired position (position w) is recommended.
IMPORTANT To be able to obtain satisfactory passenger compartment warming, the engine should have reached normal operating temperature.

The filter has the specific capability of filtering external air, thus admitting to thepassenger compartment purified air, freefrom particles such as dust, pollen, etc.
In addition to the above mentioned functions, is also reduces the concentration ofpollutants.
The filtering action is active in all air inlet
conditions and it is clearly more effectivewith the windows closed.
Have the conditions of the filter checked
at least once a year, preferably at theonset of summer by Alfa Romeo
Authorised Services.

Alfawiki.nl

88

If the car is habitually used in dusty or
polluted areas, the filter should bechecked and replaced at shorter intervals
than those specified in the Programmed
Maintenance Schedule.

If the filter is not replaced
the efficiency of the climate control system may
be seriously compromised up to
blocking the air flow at the outlets
and vents.

(for versions/markets where applicable)
A0A0203b

To start the system (fig. 96):- turn the knob rings to set the required
temperatures (driver’s side - passenger’sside).
- press the AUTO button.
IMPORTANT The climate control system makes it possible to personalise thetemperatures required on the two sidewith a maximum difference of 7°C
between the driver’s side and the passenger’s side.
IMPORTANT The climate control compressor can only work with the engine running and external temperature not verylow.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

AUTOMATIC TWO-ZONE CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM

fig. 96
With low external temperature the climate control compressor is unable
to work. It is therefore inadvisable
to use the inside air recirculation
function vwith low outside temperature as windows may mist
over quickly.

Alfawiki.nl

For further details about the system andhow to make the best use of it, read the
instructions given in pages that follow.

The coolant used for the
climate control system is
R134a which meets current regulations and does not harmthe environment in the event of accidental spillage.
Absolutely avoid the use of other fluids which are incompatible
with the system components.

89

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

GENERAL
The car is fitted with a two-zone climate
control system, controlled by an electronic
control unit which makes it possible toseparately adjust the air temperature on
the driver’s side and on the passenger’s
side. To obtain optimum temperature control in the two areas of the passenger
compartment, the system has an outside
sensor, a passenger compartment sensor
and a two-zone sun ray sensor.
On some versions the system is integrated with an incipient misting sensor
installed behind the inside rear-view mirror, capable of “controlling” a predefinedarea of the windscreen inner surface
which can automatically act on the system
to prevent or reduce misting through aseries of operations such as: opening air
re-circulation, enabling the compressor, airflow to the windscreen, fan speed sufficient for demisting; in the case of heavy
misting, enabling the MAXDEF function.

To ensure correct operation of the incipient misting sensor, stickers mustnot be applied (road licence holder,time card etc.). Care should also begiven to cleaning the windscreen
and the actual sensor, avoiding theaccumulation of dust and other substances.

IMPORTANT The demisting procedire
is enabled each time the ignition key isturned to MAR or pressing the button
AUTO. When this procedure is working it
can be turned off pressing one of the following buttons : compressor, air recirculation, air distribution, air flow. This operation inhibits the incipient misting sensor
signal until the button AUTO is pressedagain or the next time the ignition key isturned to MAR.

Alfawiki.nl

90

On certain versions, the system is integrated by an antipollution sensor capableof automatically switching on inside air
recirculation to lessen the harmful effects
of polluted air in cities, queues, tunnels
and operation of the windscreen washer(with the typical smell of spirits).
IMPORTANT The function of the
antipollution sensor is subordinate to safety conditions; therefore disabling the climate control compressor or with low external temperature, the sensor is disabled. In
any case, the sensor can be re-enabledpressing the recirculation button v until
taking it to the automatic mode.

The settings of the following functions
can be modified manually:- temperature of the air admitted to thepassenger compartment (for the driver’s
and passenger’s side separately)- inside air re-circulation on/off- fan speed

The control of the functions that havenot been modified manually will always
be automatic and, in any case, the temperature of the air flowing into the passenger compartment is controlled automatically depending on the temperatures
set on the driver’s and passenger’s displays.

- air distribution- inside air re-circulation on/off- climate control compressor on/off.

- fan speed- air distribution- climate control compressor on/off enable.

IMPORTANT Manual selections prevail over automatic ones and remain instorage until the user decides to resume
automatic control. The settings selectedmanually are stored when the engine isswitched off and resumed the next time itis started.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

The air quality control is also entrusted to
a combined particle and activated carbon
filter. The climate control system automatically controls and adjusts the following
parameters and functions:

Alfawiki.nl

91

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

A0A0090b

CONTROLS (fig. 97)
1 - Inside temperature set display (driver’s side)
2 - Inside temperature adjustment knob
(driver’s side)
3 - Fan speed set and system off display(OFF)
4 - Knob for adjusting the fan speed andswitching the system off
5 - Inside temperature set display (passenger’s side)
6 - Inside temperature adjustment knob
(passenger’s side)
7 - Maximum defrosting/demisting
on/off button for windscreen and front
side windows, rearscreen heating andwing mirror coils (MAX-DEF function)
8 - Inside air re-circulation on/off buttonv (manual/automatic)
9 - Rearscreen heating and wing mirror
defrosting on/off button (10 - Air distribution selection buttons

fig. 97
11 - Inside air temperature sensor
12 - Button for aligning the temperature
set on the passenger’s side with that on
the driver’s side MONO

Alfawiki.nl

92

13 - Button for selecting the system
automatic mode AUTO
14 - Climate control compressor on/off
enable button √IMPORTANT To be able to be acceptedby the system, the difference in the temperature between the driver’s and passenger’s side must be within a range of 7°C.

IMPORTANT The knob rings do nothave a mechanical stopper therefore, oncethe maximum or minimum value has beenreached, they are free to turn in both
directions.

It is possible to personalise the choices
made automatically by the system interveningmanually on the following controls:

The system can be started in different
ways, but it is advisable to set the temperatures required on the displays; thenpress the (13) AUTO button.
This way the system will start working
completely automatically to reach thetemperatures set as quickly as possible
and then maintain them.

- fan speed adjustment knob (4)- air distribution selection buttons (10)- inside air re-circulation on/off button(8) v- climate control on enable button (14)√.

With one or more functions engaged
manually, the adjustment of the temperature of the air admitted to the passenger
compartment continues to be controlled
automatically by the system (left led on
button 13 AUTO on) except with the climate control compressor off.
In fact, in this condition the air admitted
to the passenger compartment cannot
have a lower temperature than the outside air; this condition is indicated by theturning off of the two leds on button (13)
AUTO and flashing on the display (1)and/or (5) related with the temperature
rate that cannot be obtained.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

HOW TO USE
THE AUTOMATIC TWO-ZONE
CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM(fig. 97)

Manually selecting one or more of thesefunctions turns off the right led on the button (13) AUTO.

During completely automatic system
operation, the temperatures set can bechanged at any time; the system will automatically change its settings to adjust to
the new requirements.

Alfawiki.nl

93

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

A0A0204b

AIR TEMPERATURE
ADJUSTMENT KNOBS (fig. 98)
Turning the rings of knobs (2 or 6),
clockwise or counter-clockwise, respectively highers or lowers the temperature of
the air required respectively in the left
zone (knob 2) or right zone (knob 6) of
the passenger compartment. The temperatures set are shown on the displays (1)and (5) above the knobs.
Separate operation of the temperatures
set is restored automatically using knob
(6).

fig. 98

Turning the knob rings clockwise orcounter-clockwise until they reach theextreme selections HI or LO, the maximum heating or cooling functions arerespectively engaged:

Alfawiki.nl

94

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

A0A0218b

HI function(highest heating power - fig. 99)
This is turned on setting on the display atemperature above 32.5°C, and can be
activated independently from the driver’s
or passenger’s side or both; this setting
brings the system to the “monozone”
mode and is shown on both displays.
This function can be engaged whenrequiring to heat the passenger compartment as quickly as possible, exploiting the
maximum potential of the system.
This function uses the maximum temperature of the coolant fluid, while air distribution and fan speed are controlled according to the system settings.
This function is unadvisable withthe engine cold to prevent admitting air that is not warm enoughto the passenger compartment.

fig. 99
Pressing key (13) AUTO the display willshow a temperature of 32.5°C and returns
to an operating condition with automatic
temperature adjustment.

All manual settings are possible with thisfunction on.
To switch the system off, simply turn thering of knob (2) or (6) of the temperature set to a value below 32.5°C; theopposite display will show 32.5°C.

Alfawiki.nl

95

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

A0A0219b

LO function(highest cooling power - fig. 100)
This is turned on setting on the display atemperature below 16.5°C; this setting isshown on both displays.
This function can be engaged whenrequiring to cool the passenger compartment as quickly as possible, exploiting the
maximum potential of the system.
The function cuts off air heating,engages inside air re-circulation (to prevent admitting hot air to the passenger
compartment) and the climate control
compressor, takes air distribution to R E
and the fan speed as set by the system.

fig. 100

All manual settings are possible with thisfunction on.
To switch the function off, simply turnthe ring of knob (2) or (6) of the temperature set on a value above 16.5°C;
the opposite display will show 16.5°C.
Pressing key (13) AUTO the display willshow a temperature of 16.5°C andreturns to an operating condition with
automatic temperature adjustment.

Alfawiki.nl

96

A0A0207b

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

MONO BUTTON FOR
ALIGNMENT OF THE
TEMPERATURE SET (fig. 101)
Pressing button (12) MONO automatically aligns the temperature on the passenger’s side with that on the driver’s
side, therefore it is possible to set thesame temperature between the two zones
simply turning the ring of knob (2) on thedriver’s side.
This function is provided to simplify temperature adjustment of the whole passenger compartment when only the driver ison board.

fig. 101

Separate operation of the temperatures
set is automatically restored when thepassenger uses the ring on knob (6) orpresses button (12) MONO.

Alfawiki.nl

97

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

A0A0205b

FAN SPEEDADJUSTMENT KNOB
(fig. 102-103)
Turning the ring of knob (4), clockwise
or counter-clockwise, increases or decreases the speed of the fan, thus the amountof air admitted to the passenger compartment; the 16 selectable speeds are shown
on a bar (in steps of 3), up to a maximumof 6 bars lit:
- maximum fan speed = all bars lit;
- minimum fan speed = one bar lit.

IMPORTANT Pressing the inside air
recirculation button (8) v it is possible
to obtain the inlet of untreated outside air
to the passenger compartment.

98

fig. 102

The fan can be cut off (all bars off) only
if the climate control compressor has beenswitched off pressing button (14) √. To
restore automatic fan speed control, after amanual adjustment, press button (13)
AUTO. Completely turning the ring of knob
(4) counter-clockwise switches the systemoff, with the following situation: display(1) off; display (5) off; centre display (3)with litdisplay OFF and left led on inside air
re-circulation button (8) v on.

A0A0206b

fig. 103
To turn the system on again, simply turnthe ring of knob (4) clockwise, or press
any one button, except the inside air re-circulation (8) andrearscreen (9) buttons;
Alfawiki.nl
this operation restores all the operating
conditions stored previously.

IMPORTANT On leaving the OFF condition, inside air re-circulation v returns
to the condition prior to switching off.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

A0A0208b

AIR DISTRIBUTION SELECTION
BUTTONS (fig. 104)
Pressing one or more buttons (10) it ispossible to manually choose one of the 5possible air distributions to the passenger
compartment:
R E Flow of air to the dashboard centre
and side outlets and rear outlet.
R E Splitting of the air flow between the
Z vents to the lower part of the passenger compartment (warmest air)and the dashboard centre and side outlets and the rear outlet (coolest air).
The air flow distribution is particularly
useful in spring and autumn, when
the sun is shining.
Z Air flow towards the front and rear
lower parts of the passenger compartment. Due to the natural tendency of heat to spread upwards, thistype of distribution allows heating of
the passenger compartment in the
shortest time, also giving a prompt
feeling of warmth to the coldest partsof the body.

fig. 104
Q Splitting of the air flow between the
Z windscreen and side window defrosting/demisting vents and the lower
part the of the car. This type of air distribution allows satisfactory heatingof the passenger compartment while
preventing misting of the windows.
Q Air flow to the windscreen and front
side window vents to demist or defrost them.

IMPORTANT Pressing one of thesebuttons turns on (led on button itself on)
or off (led on button off) the associatedfunctions if the combination chosen isamong the 5 possible ones; if not it only
activates the main function of the buttonpressed, without the possibility of turning
off with another press (at least in one distribution the air flow should be spread in
the passenger compartment).
To restore automatic air distribution control after a manual selection, press button(13) AUTO.

Alfawiki.nl

99

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

A0A0210b

CLIMATE CONTROLCOMPRESSOR ON/OFF
ENABLE BUTTON (fig. 105)
Pressing button (14) √ enables theturning on of the climate control compressor. This condition is shown by the lighting
up of the led on the button itself.
When the climate control compressor isturned off, the leds on buttons (13) AUTO
and (14) √ go off; automatic inside air
re-circulation control is also excluded (bothleds off on button 8 v) which always
stays off to prevent misting the windows;
even if unadvisable, it is still possible torestore automatic operation of inside air
re-circulation pressing button (8) v.

fig. 105

A0A0211b

With the climate control compressor off,
it is not possible to admit air to the passenger compartment with a temperature
below the outside temperature; in thiscase, the value flashes on the display concerning the temperature that cannot bereached and the left led on button (13AUTO - fig. 106) goes off.
The switching off of the climate control
compressor remains in storage even whenthe engine has been stopped. To restore
automatic control for switching on the climate control compressor, press button(14) √ again, the led on the button

100

fig. 106
turns on, or press button (13) AUTO; inwhich case, however, the other manual
settings set will be cancelled.

Alfawiki.nl

Operation of the climate
control compressor is necessary for cooling and dehumidifying the air; it is advisable
to keep this function always on, toprevent window misting problems.

A0A0212b

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

INSIDE AIR RE-CIRCULATION
ON/OFF BUTTON (fig. 107)
Inside air re-circulartion is controlledaccording to three operating logics:- automatic control, indicated by theturning on of the right led on the button;- forced engagement (inside air re-circulation always on), indicated by the turning
on of the left led on the button (and by
the right led going off at the same time);- forced switching off (inside air re-circulation always off with air inlet from outside), indicated by the turning off of both
leds.
These operating conditions are obtainedpressing in sequence the inside air re-circulation button (8) v.
When inside air re-circulation is controlled automatically by the system, theright led on the air re-circulation button(8) v stays on all the time and the left
led shows the air re-circulation condition:
on = air re-circulation operating;off = air re-circulation off.
If inside air re-circulation has been turnedon or off manually, the led on button(13) AUTO turns off.

fig. 107
In automatic operation , inside air re-circulation is turned automatically when the
antipollution sensor detects the presenceof polluted air, for example in cities,
queues, tunnels and operation of thewindscreen washer (with the typical smellof spirits).

With low external temperature the climate control compressor is unable
to work. It is therefore inadvisable
to use the inside air recirculation
function v with low outside temperature as windows may mist
over quickly.

The inside air- re-circulation system makes it possible to reach the required“heating” or “cooling” conditions
faster. It is however inadvisable touse it on rainy/cold days as it
would considerably increase thepossibility of the windows mistinginside, especially if the climate control system is off.

Alfawiki.nl

101

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

A0A0209b

It is advisable to turn on
the inside air re-circulation
system in queues or tunnels
to avoid admitting polluted air fromoutside. The prolonged use of thisfunction should however be avoided, especially with several persons
on board, to avoid the possibility of
the windows misting inside.

fig. 108
In certain weather conditions (e.g.: outside temperature around 0°C) andwith automatic air re-circulation
control on, mist may form on thewindows. In this case press the inside air re-circulation button (8)v, to switch off re-circulation(leds on button off) and if necessary increase the flow of air to thewindscreen.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION AUTO
BUTTON (fig. 108)
Pressing the (13) AUTO button the system automatically adjusts the amount anddistribution of the air admitted to the passenger compartment, cancelling all theprevious manual adjustments.
This condition is indicated by the lighting
up of both leds on the button itself.

Alfawiki.nl

102

When the right led, on button (13) AUTO
is off, this means that one or more manual
operations have been carried out and therefore automatic control is not complete(except temperature control which is always
automatic) indicated by the left led on, orthat the system is in the OFF condition.

A0A0213b

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARFRONT WINDOWS FASTDEMISTING/DEFROSTING(MAX-DEF) FUNCTION (fig. 109)
Pressing button (7) - the climate control automatically activates timed operation of all the functions needed to quicken
demisting/defrosting of the windscreen
and front side windows, i.e.:- it turns on the climate control compressor;- switches off inside air re-circulation, if on(both leds off);- sets the maximum air temperature (HI)on both displays (1) and (5);- operates the fan at a predefined speed;- directs the flow of air towards the windscreen and front side window vents;- turns on rearscreen heating and, if present, the wing mirror coils.
When the maximum demisting/defrosting
feature is on, the led on button (7) -,the led on the rearscreen heating button(9) ( and the led on button (14) √turn on; at the same time the leds on button (8) v.

fig. 109
IMPORTANT If the engine is not hot
enough, the function does not immediately engage the pre-established fan speed,
to restrict the inlet of air to the passenger
compartment that is not warm enough todemist the windows.
When the maximum demisting/defrosting function is on, the only manual operation possible are manual adjustment of the
fan and switching rearscreen heating off.

Pressing one of the following buttons
again: (7) -, (8) v, (12) MONO,(13) AUTO or (14) √ the systemswitches off the maximum demisting/defrosting function, restoring the operating conditions of the system prior to turning it on, in addition to activating the last
function required, if any.

Alfawiki.nl

103

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

A0A0214b

WING MIRROR AND
REARSCREENDEFROSTING/DEMISTING
BUTTON (fig. 110)
Pressing button (9) ( turns on
demisting/defrosting of the rearscreen
and, if present, the wing mirror coils.
The turning on of this function is shownby the turning on of the led on the button.
This function is timed and switches off
automatically after 20 minutes, or pressing the button again; the function is also
switched off when the engine is stopped
and will not be switched on again the nexttime the engine is started.

fig. 110
POLLEN FILTERIMPORTANT The system automatically turns on rearscreen heating if the temperature is below 3°C.

The filter has the specific capability of filtering external air, thus admitting to thepassenger compartment purified air, freefrom particles such as dust, pollen, etc.

Have the conditions of the filter checked
by Alfa Romeo Authorised Services at least
once a year, preferably at the onset ofsummer.

IMPORTANT Do not apply stickers on
the inside of the rearscreen over the heating filaments to avoid damage that mightcause it to stop working properly.

In addition to the above mentioned functions, is also reduces the concentration ofpollutants.

If the car is used mainly in dusty or polluted areas it should be checked and, if
necessary, replaced at shorter intervals.

The filtering action takes place under all
air inlet conditions and it is clearly mosteffective with the windows shut.

Alfawiki.nl

104

If the filter is not replaced
the efficiency of the climate control system may
be seriously compromised up to
blocking the air flow at the outlets
and vents.

ACTIVATION(fig. 111)
(upon request forversions/markets whereapplicable)

Sensors are automatically activatedwhen the reverse gear is engaged.

Parking sensors are located in the rear
bumper and their function is to inform thedriver, through an intermittent buzzer,
about the presence of obstacles behindthe car.

As the distance from the obstacle behindthe car decreases, the acoustic alarm
becomes more frequent.
BUZZER WARNINGS
When the reverse gear is engaged anintermittent acoustic signal is automatically activated.
The acoustic signal:

OPERATION WITH TRAILER

Parking sensor operation
is deactivated automatically when the trailer electric cable plug is fitted into the car
tow hook socket.
Sensors are reactivated automaticallywhen removing the trailer cable plug.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

PARKING SENSORS– becomes louder as the reduction of
distance between the car and the obstacle
decreases;– becomes continuous when the distance between the car and the obstacle isless that 30 cm and stops immediately if
the distance raises.
A0A0735b– is constant if the distance is unvaried.
If this situation takes place for side sensors, the signal is stopped after about 3
seconds to prevent sound indications
when performing manoeuvres near walls.

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 111

105

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARCONTROLSTAILGATE OPENING (fig. 112)

Use of the hazard lights is
ruled by the Highway Codeof the country in which the
car is used. Observe regulations.

Electric tailgate release is only allowed with
the ignition key in the ignition switch at
MAR car stationary, at STOP or PARK
for 3 minutes without opening/closing adoor. To release the tailgate, press button(A) on the central console panel.

FOG LIGHTS (fig. 112)

HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS(fig. 112)

Press button (B) again to switch off.

They are switched on by pressing button(C), on the central console panel, regardless of the position of the ignition key.

These are turned on pressing button (B),on the centre console panel, when the outer lights are already on, at the same time
the led on the button itself turns on.
IMPORTANT The front foglights should
be used in compliance with the local traffic
laws.

REAR FOG GUARDS (fig. 112)
These are turned on, with the dipped beam
headlights or fog lights on, pressing button(D) on the centre console panel, at thesame time the warning light on the button
itself turns on.
Turning the ignition key to STOP the fog
guards are automatically turned off and they
do not come on the next time the engine
is started unless button (D) is pressed. Toturn them off press button (D).
IMPORTANT Always use the rear fog
guards in compliance with local regulations.

When the hazard lights are switched on,
the switch itself begins to flash together withthe direction indicators and warning lights
on the instrument panel. This function isswitched off by pressing the button again.
A0A0091b

Alfawiki.nl

106

fig. 112INERTIAL FUEL CUT-OFF
SWITCH (fig. 113)

To lock the doors simultaneously, press button (E), on the centre console panel, regardless of the position of the ignition key.

This is an automatic safety switch, to befound on the floor next to the driver’s door
pillar, which is triggered in the event of acrash of a certain magnitude to interrupt theflow of fuel.

The deterrent led turns on as follows:– with the ignition key at MAR glowing
steadily with a yellow light;

If a smell of fuel is noted
following an accident, or
the fuel system is leaking,to avoid the risk of fire do not reset the switch.

The cutting in of the inertial switch is shownon the display of the instrument cluster.

– with the ignition key at STOP flashing with a red light (deterrence condition).

If no leaks are found the car can be restarted. Press button (A) to activate the fuel supply system again.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM(fig. 112)

A0A0092b

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 113

107

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARHEADLIGHT AIMING DEVICE(fig. 114)
The headlights should be aimed correctly
depending on the car load.
For the required adjustment (only possible
with low beams on), press buttons ▲/▼:– press button ▲, to increase by one position (e.g.: 0 ➟ 1 ➟ 2 ➟ 3);– press button ▼ to decrease by one position (e.g.: 3 ➟ 2 ➟ 1 ➟ 0);
The display (A), in the tachometer shows
positions during adjustment.

Correct positions as a function of the load:

HAND BRAKE (fig. 115)

– position 0: one or two people occupying the front seats

The hand brake lever is located between
the two front seats.

– position 1: five people;– position 2: five people + load in theboot;

To operate the brake when the car is stationary, pull lever (A) upwards, until the required braking action is obtained.

– position 3: driver + 350 Kg load all
stowed in luggage compartment

When the ignition key is at MAR, thewarning light on the instrument cluster x
will come on.

Adjust the beams every
time the load carriedchanges.

The wheels should belocked after a few clicks ofthe hand brake. If it does
not occur contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services to have the handbrake adjusted.

Xenon headlights aiming is automatic, versions with this optional are therefore not fitted with headlight aiming device.
A0A1106b

A0A0620b

Alfawiki.nl

108 fig. 114

fig. 115

GEARSHIFT LEVER (fig. 116)– slightly lift the lever (A) and press therelease button (B);The position of the single gears is shownby the pictogram on the gearshift lever knob.

– keeping the button pressed lower thelever, the warning light x on the instrument cluster will go out.

When shifting gear, always fully depress
the clutch pedal. Before engaging reversegear (R) wait for the car to be stationary.

To prevent the car from moving accidentally, keep the brake pedal pressed whenengaging the hand brake.

Certain versions are equipped with 6-speed
gearbox. For the versions with 6 gears, toengage reverse (R) lift (with the fingersof the same hand holding the lever) the ring
(A-fig. 116) positioned under the lever.
After engaging the reverse, release the ring.
To change from reverse to another gear, it
is not necessary to lift the ring on the lever.

IMPORTANT The hand brake lever (A)is fitted with a safety device which prevents
the brake from being released when, withthe lever pulled, button (B) is pressed.
Therefore, to release the brake, in addition
to pressing button (B), it is also necessary
to pull lever (A) further upwards to release
the safety device, then lower the lever completely.
IMPORTANT On certain versions abuzzer sounds to alert the driver if the car
is moved with the hand brake engaged.

To change gear smoothly,
the clutch pedal must be
fully depressed. Therefore,
there should be no obstacles on thefloor under the pedal unit: makesure that any mats are well laid anddo not interfere with the pedals.

IMPORTANT Reverse gear may only beengaged with the car completely at a standstill. With the engine running, before engaging reverse gear it is necessary to wait
for at least 3 seconds with the clutch pedal
fully depressed to prevent clashing and thepossibility of damaging the gears.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

To release the hand brake:

A0A0684b

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 116

109

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

SELESPEED
TRANSMISSION(on request for versions/markets
where applicable)
IMPORTANT To be able to use the Selespeed correctly, this chapter should be readin full to understand the correct, permissible
operations to be carried out right from thestart.
This device comprises a conventional mechanical transmission, to which an electronically-controlled electrohydraulic device
has been added, which automatically controls the clutch and gear engagement.

Gearshifting takes place through a floating
control lever (A-fig. 117) with “only one
stable central position”. Using this lever it ispossible to request increase/decrease of theratio of the gear engaged and/or engagement of reverse gear (R) or neutral (N).
There are also two levers on the steering
wheel spokes (fig. 118) through which,
only with the car on the move (with speed
above 0,5 km/h), it is possible to increase/decrease the gear engaged.

The gearbox can work according to two operating modes:– the first is semi-automatic (hereinafter
called MANUAL), in which the driver shifts
gear directly using the lever on the central
console or the levers on the steering wheel
spokes;– the second is automatic, called CITY
(when selecting CITY with button B-fig.
117, the word CITY will be displayed fig.
119). In this mode the system decides directly when to shift gear.

The clutch pedal has been eliminated andthe car moves off using only the accelerator
pedal.

A0A0697b

A0A0669b

A0A9017i

Alfawiki.nl

110 fig. 117

fig. 118

fig. 119The gear selected (fig. 119) is always
displayed regardless of the mode being selected selected .
N = neutral;
1 = first gear;
2 = second gear;
3 = third gear;
4 = fourth gear;

In CITY or SPORT, the selected mode isalso displayed.
IMPORTANT SPORT mode can only
be activated after deactivating the CITY
mode.
A warning light, a message (fig. 120)
and a buzzer draw the attention of the driver in the event of a fault at Selespeed transmission.
The Selespeed considerably simplifies useof the car, reducing the fatigue of city driving or when frequent gearshifting is required, at the same time offering brilliant
performance.

5 = fifth gear;
R = reverse.

SYSTEM ACTIVATIONIMPORTANT Opening the driver’s door,
the Selespeed starts the hydraulic part ofthe system to prepare it for the engine to be
started.
Turning the ignition key to MAR, all thesegments of the display (fig. 119), thegearbox warning light (fig. 120) and theword CITY turn on. After about one second,the display indicates the gear engaged (N,1, 2, 3, 4, 5, R).
IMPORTANT If after 10 seconds the display segment do not display the gear engaged or the warning light stays on, turn theignition key to STOP and wait for the display to go off, then repeat the system activation procedure. If the fault persists, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

With gearshift to CITY gears can be shifted manually using both the gearshift leveror the steering wheel controls. Gearshift
stays in CITY.

A0A9081g

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 120

111

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

OPERATION WITH ENGINE OFF
IMPORTANT Before using the gearshift
control lever, always check the gear engaged on the display (N, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,
R).
With the engine off and the car stationary it is possible to engage all the gears.
With the car stationary and with the brake
pedal pressed, requests to shift gears areboth accepted through the control lever on
the central console or through the steering
wheel levers.
To request gearshifting, in addition to keeping the brake pedal pressed:– to shift upwards (+) (fig. 121) push
the lever “forwards” (if the car is in first gear
it shifts to second, if in second it shifts tothird and so on up to fifth). If the system
is in neutral (N) or reverse (R) moving thelever forwards causes the engagement of
first gear (1).
– to shift downwards (–) (fig. 121)
push the lever backwards (if the car is in
fifth gear it shifts to fourth, if in fourth it
shifts to third and so on down to first gear).
To allow setting the transmission to neutral (N), starting from the condition withthe car stationary and brake pedal pressed,
move the gearshift lever to the right (fig.
122).
From any gear (N, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5) andwith the car practically at a standstill, it ispossible to request engagement of reverse
gear, pushing the lever to the right and thenbackwards (fig. 123).

A0A0698b

If the car is on the move, the request is
not accepted; wait for the car to stop andthen request reverse gear engagement
again.
IMPORTANT Once a gear has beenchanged it is necessary to immediately release the gearshift control lever after making the request. A manoeuvre prolonged(over 10 seconds) makes the system automatically switch to CITY mode; everything stops releasing the gearshift lever.
IMPORTANT If wanting to leave the carparked on a sloping road with a gear engaged to keep it braked, it is necessary tocheck that the display shows the new gear
engaged and then wait for 1 to 2 seconds
before releasing the brake pedal to allow
complete clutch engagement.

A0A0699b

A0A0700b

Alfawiki.nl

112 fig. 121

fig. 122

fig. 123

The engine can be started with the gear
engaged or in neutral (N), provided that thebrake pedal is pressed down.
IMPORTANT Keep the pedal fully depressed during starting. Since the brake pedal becomes hard if it is pressed repeatedly
with the engine off, in this situation it is necessary to increase the pressure on the pedal itself to start the engine.
After starting, the gearbox sets to neutral
automatically, the display shows the letter(N) and the system selects the operating
mode memorised before switching off.

SWITCHING OFF THE ENGINEAND SYSTEM DEACTIVATION

NEVER leave the car withthe gears in neutral (N).

Turning the ignition key to STOP the engine switches off: the gear selected before
turning the engine off remains engaged.
If the engine stops with the gearbox inneutral (N), the buzzer and the blinkingof (N) draw the attention of the driver sothat the car can be put in safety conditions
engaging the first gear (1) or reverse (R).
In this case, it is necessary to turn the ignition key to MAR and with the brake pedal pressed, engage first gear (1) or reverse(R).

If the engine fails to startwith the gear engaged, thedriver is alerted of the potentially dangerous situation due
to the fact that the gearbox has
automatically set to neutral by thebuzzer and the display.

Never remove the ignition
key when the car is moving. In addition to the factthat the Selespeed system would
not work properly up to stopping
the car, the steering wheel would
lock automatically the first time itis turned.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

STARTING THE ENGINE

It is absolutely necessary
to turn off the engine consequently deactivating theSelespeed system keeping the brake
pedal pressed: release the pedal
ONLY when the display goes off.

Alfawiki.nl

113

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

MOVING OFF THE CAR
With the engine running and the car stationary, the gears that can be engaged formoving off are only first (1), second (2) orreverse (R).
To engage them it is possible to use thecontrol lever on the centre console, with thebrake pedal pressed, as the steering wheel
levers allow gear engagement only over 0.5
km/h.
IMPORTANT Reverse gear (R) can be
engaged from each of the following otherratios: neutral (N), first gear (1) or second
gear (2). If the car is on the move, the request is not accepted; it is necessary to wait
for the car to be completely stopped andthen request reverse (R) again.

The driver is informed of the reverse gear
engaged condition by the intermittent soundof the buzzer as well as by the display.
IMPORTANT If while shifting from reverse (R)/first gear (1) or neutral (N)/first gear (1) sticking occurs on the firstgear, the system automatically engages second gear (2).
This should not be considered a failure because it is part of the operating logic. For
the same reason, if sticking occurs on reverse gear, the system controls partial clutch
closing so that the gear can be engaged;in this case the engagement of reverse gear(R) will not be as smooth as usual.

Alfawiki.nl

114

Moving off the car is obtained:
1) releasing the brake pedal;
2) gradually pressing the accelerator pedal.
The more the accelerator pedal is pressed
the higher the car pick-up torque will be.

After a request to shift
gear with the car stationary, before pressing the accelerator pedal to make the car
start, the driver must always checkthat the gear engaged shown on
the display is the one required.

– With the car stopped and a gear engaged always keep the brake pedal presseduntil deciding to move off;
– during prolonged halts with the engine
running it is advisable to keep the gearbox
in neutral;– when the car is parked facing uphill, do
not use the moving off manoeuvre to keep
the car still; use the brake pedal and press
the accelerator pedal only when deciding tomove off;– use second gear only when more control is needed for moving off manoeuvres at
low speed;– if, with reverse gear engaged, you needto engage first gear or vice versa, shift gear
only when the car is completely stationary
and with the brake pedal pressed.

Though strongly inadvisable, if due to unforeseen circumstances when driving downhill the car is allowed to travel with the gearbox in neutral (N), when the engagementof a gear is requested, the system automatically engages the best gear to allow
transmission of the torque to the wheels in
relation to the speed of the car.
When travelling downhill with a gear engaged and the accelerator released (if the
car is moving), beyond a pre-establishedspeed, the system engages the clutch automatically to give the car adequate engine
braking.

Still due to safety reasons, with the car stationary, the engine running and gear (1),(2) or (R) engaged, the system activatesthe buzzer and automatically shifts to neutral (N) when:– no action is made on the accelerator
and/or brake pedals for at least 3 minutes;– the brake is pressed for over 10 minutes;– the driver’s door is opened and the accelerator and brake pedal are not pressed
for at least 1.5 seconds.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

IMPORTANT NOTESFor safety reasons the Selespeed system
activates the buzzer when: clutch overheating occurs during car starting; in thiscase, it is necessary to “force” moving off
avoiding hesitations or to release the accelerator and use the brake pedal to park the
car if the car is on a slope.

Alfawiki.nl

115

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

STOPPING THE CAR

OPERATION

To stop the car, simply release the accelerator pedal and, if necessary, press thebrake pedal.

The gearbox can work according to two operating modes:

Regardless of the gear engaged and theoperating mode activated (MANUAL or
CITY) the system automatically disengages
the clutch and shifts to a lower gear.
If deciding to move off again without having stopped the car completely, the mostsuitable ratio will be available for accelerator again.
Stopping the car the system automatically engages first gear (1).

– the first one is semi-automatic (MANUAL): the decision to change gear is left tothe driver who decides the most appropriate
moment; this mode features the two following logics:
1) normal: for comfort driving;2) sport: (to be activated by button Bfig. 124): for sporty driving.
Sport operating mode is selected by pressing button SPORT (B-fig. 124) set on
the gearshift lever; when selecting thismode, the display will show SPORT.

Alfawiki.nl

116– the second one is fully automatic(CITY), in which the system decides directly when to shift gear according to driving
conditions.
To select the CITY mode, press button
CITY set on the gearshift lever; when selecting this mode, the display will show
CITY.

The requests to change gear may takeplace through:In the MANUAL operating mode the display shows the gear engaged.

– the control lever on the centre console(A-fig. 124);

In this operating mode, the decision tochange gear is left to the driver who decides
the most appropriate moment.

– the buttons on the steering wheel (fig.
125), which can be operated only when
the car speed exceeds 0.5 km/h.
The MANUAL operating mode is set
when, with the CITY mode selected, the
CITY button (A-fig. 126) is pressedagain, thereby cutting out the previously selected mode.

When changing gear it is not necessary
to release the accelerator pedal because theSelespeed system directly controls the engine in such a way as to:– reduce and then increase engine torque;– adapt the engine speed to the new gear
ratio engaged.
When downshifting, the engine is accelerated automatically to bring it to the speed
necessary with the new gear ratio.
Neutral (N) is accepted until the car speed
exceeds 40 km/h.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARSEMIAUTOMATIC OPERATION(MANUAL)

The reverse gear engagement command(R) is accepted only if the car is stationary.

A0A0702b

A0A0669b

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 124

fig. 125

117

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

With the accelerator pedal pressed to over
60% of its stroke and an engine speed
above 5000 rpm, gearshifting becomesquicker. In the MANUAL operating mode
there are certain automatic/security devices
which simplify driving:– if sticking occurs during the engagementof a gear, the system firstly tries to engage
the required gear again and, if it is still notpossible, it automatically engages the immediately higher one to avoid leaving the
car in neutral .

– when slowing down, the clutch is disengaged and the gear ratio is reduced automatically to be ready for possibly picking
up speed again; if not, stopping the car, firstgear (1) will be engaged automatically;

IMPORTANT It is advisable to wait for
the end of a gear shifting operation before
requesting another one, to avoid multiple
requests in rapid succession.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION (CITY)
The CITY automatic operating mode is selected pressing the button (A-fig. 126)at the base of the gearshift lever.
In addition to the gear, the display willshow the word CITY.
The system decides directly when to shift
gears in relation to the engine rpm and driving conditions.
Releasing the accelerator pedal quickly, thesystem does not engage a higher gear in order to maintain an adequate level of engine
brake.

– request to change gear that could takethe engine above the maximum rpm or below the minimum permissible rpm are notaccepted;

A0A0701b

Alfawiki.nl

118

fig. 126

Failures to the Selespeed gearbox are indicated on the display by warning light t(fig. 127), dedicated message andbuzzer.

If the warning light t
and the message are displayed, contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services as soon as
possible to have the fault eliminated.

In the event of a fault to the gearshift lever,the system automatically activates the automatic CITY mode to allow the car toreach the nearest Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services to have the fault detected eliminated.
In the event of a fault to the other gearbox components, the system only allows theengagement of certain gears: first gear (1),second gear (2) and reverse (R).

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

FAILURE INDICATIONSIn the event of whatevertransmission fault, contact
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services as soon as possible to havethe system checked.
A0A9081g

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 127

119

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

BUZZER WARNINGS

PARKING THE CAR

TOWING THE CAR

The buzzer is activated when:

To park the car safely it is absolutely necessary to engage first gear (1) or reverse(R) and also the handbrake if the road ison a slope.

IMPORTANT For towing the car, adhere
to local regulations. Make sure that the gearbox is in neutral (N) (checking that the car
moves when pushed) and proceed as for
towing a normal car with mechanical gearbox following the instructions given in section “In an emergency”.

– reverse gear is engaged (R);– the car is parked with the gearbox inneutral (N); signal that can be noted turning the ignition key to STOP;– clutch overheating occurs when moving
off;– the system has shifted automaticallyto neutral (N) when:
there is no action on the accelerator
and/or brake pedal for at least 3 minutes;
or the brake is pressed for over 10 minutes;

Turning the engine off with the car facing
uphill and a gear engaged, it is absolutely
necessary to wait for the gear display to go
off before releasing the brake pedal, so thatthe clutch is fully disengaged.
If the gearbox is in neutral (N) and wanting to engage a parking gear, the systemshould be activated and with the foot on thebrake pedal it is necessary to engage (1)or (R).

or the driver’s door is opened and no action is made on the accelerator and brakefor at least 1.5 seconds;

While towing the car do
not start the engine.

or detection of a gearbox fault;– gearbox fault.

Alfawiki.nl

120

If setting to neutral is not possible, do not
tow the car and contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

Never travel with theglovebox open: the lid
might harm the passenger
in the event of an accident.

GLOVEBOXOn the dashboard there is a glovebox withlid and light.
To open use handle (A-fig. 128).
When the glovebox is opened with the key
at MAR an inside courtesy light turns on(A-fig. 129).

The fitting is completed by device (B), on
the lid, for inserting a pen or pencil.
IMPORTANT Turning the ignition key to
STOP, opening the glovebox, the light inside can only be turned on for 15 minutes;
after which the system turns it off to avoid
draining the battery.

A0A0108b

FRONT ROOF LIGHT(fig. 130)
The roof light comprises two courtesy lights
with corresponding control switch.
IMPORTANT When a door is opened,
the roof light turns on and timing of about
3 minutes is activated automatically, after
which it goes off; closing the doors (within
the 3 minutes) a second timing of about 7
seconds is activated to allow car starting.

A0A0109b

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

INTERIOR FITTINGS

A0A0111b

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 128

fig. 129

fig. 130

121

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Unlocking the doors using the remote control, the roof light turns on gradually and timing is activated automatically for about 15
seconds. Locking the doors with the remotecontrol the roof light turns off gradually.
The lights are turned off moving the ignition key to MAR (with the doors closed).
With switch (A) in the central position(1), both lights are turned on when a door
is opened.

IMPORTANT Turning the ignition key to
STOP, turning the roof light on is only possible for 15 minutes; after which the system
turns it off to avoid draining the battery.
IMPORTANT Before leaving the car,make sure that both switches are in the central position. By so doing, the roof lights willturn off when the doors are closed. Forgetting a door open the lights will turn off automatically after a few seconds.

Pressing switch (A) to the left (position0), the lights stay off (OFF position).

COURTESY LIGHTS(fig. 131)
On the back of the driver’s or passenger’s
sun visor, opening the cover (A) the roof
lights turn on (B) at the side of the courtesy
mirror, with the ignition key at MAR. Theselights allow use of the courtesy mirror when
the light is poor.
IMPORTANT Turning the ignition key to
STOP the lights can be activated only for
15 minutes: after which the system turns
them off to avoid draining the battery.

Pressing switch (A) to the right (position
2) both lights stay on.
Switch (B) turns the lights on individually.
Pressing switch (B) to the left (position 0)
the left light is turned on. Pressing the switch
to the right (position 2) the right light isturned on.
With switch (B) in the central position (position 1) the lights stay off.

A0A0112b

Alfawiki.nl

122

fig. 131

IMPORTANT When a door is opened,
the roof light turns on and timing of about
3 minutes is activated automatically, after
which it goes off; closing the doors (within
the 3 minutes) a second timing of about 7
seconds is activated to allow car starting.
Unlocking the doors using the remote control, the roof light turns on gradually and timing is activated automatically for about 15
seconds. Locking the doors with the remotecontrol the roof light turns off gradually.
The light turns off in any case turning theignition key to MAR (with the door
closed).

On the light there is a switch with threepositions.
When switch (A) is in the central position (0) the light turns on automaticallywhen a door is opened.
Moving the switch to the right (position 1)
the light stays off.

PUDDLE LIGHTS (fig. 133)(for versions/markets whereapplicable)
The light (A) housed in the doors turns onwhen the associated door is opened, regardless of the position of the ignition key.

Moving the switch to the left (position 2)
the light stays on.
IMPORTANT Turning the ignition key to
STOP the roof light can be turned on for
only 15 minutes; after which it is turned off
to avoid draining the battery.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARREAR ROOF LIGHT (fig. 132)

IMPORTANT Before leaving the car,make sure that the switch (A) is in the central position (0), so that the roof light turns
off when the doors are closed.

A0A0633b

A0A0243b

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 132

fig. 133

123

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

DETERRENT LED (fig. 134)
The led (A) on the instrument cluster
comes into operation when the doors arelocked (ignition key at STOP or removed)
and it remains in the “deterrence” condition, flashing with a red light until the nexttime the doors are unlocked.
IMPORTANT If a door or the tailgate
are not closed perfectly, the deterrent led
flashes at a higher frequency for 4 seconds
and then flashes at normal frequency again.

FRONT ASHTRAY AND CIGAR
LIGHTER (fig. 135)
To gain access to the ashtray and the cigar lighter open the lid (A).
To use the cigar lighter, with the key atMAR, press button (B); after a few seconds the button will return automaticallyto its initial position and the cigar lighter isready for use.
Remove the tray to empty and clean theashtray (C).

Always ensure that thecigar lighter has turned off.

The position of the cigar lighter in relation
to the ashtray and viceversa, may vary depending on the trim level.

A0A0005b

A0A0634b

Alfawiki.nl

124 fig. 134

Do not use the ashtray as
waste paper basket: it
might set on fire in contact
with cigarette stubs.

fig. 135

The cigar lighter gets extremely hot. Handle withcare and prevent its use by
children: danger of fire and/or
burning.

For the rear passengers there are two concealed ashtrays.
To use or remove pull in the direction of
the arrow.

CARD HOLDER RECESSAND GLASS HOLDER (fig. 137)
(for versions/markets whereapplicable)

ODDMENT POCKETSON FRONT DOORS (fig. 138)
Each front door has an oddment pocket(A).

The interior fittings are completed by theremovable card holder recess (A) and glass
holder (B) located on the centre of the dashboard. To use them, press as shown.

A0A0115b

A0A0116b

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARREAR ASHTRAYS (fig. 136)

A0A0117b

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 136

fig. 137

fig. 138

125

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

CELL PHONEPROVISIONODDMENT RECESSES ON
CENTRE CONSOLE(fig. 139)

The visors can be directed at the front andside.

On the centre console, at the side of thehand brake lever, depending on the versions,the following recesses are provided:

Behind, the visors have a courtesy mirror
with a light at the side (A). To use, open
the cover (B).

The car may be fitted with a provision for
installing a cell phone.

– can holder (B);The lights allow use of the mirrors with dim
light.

– radio + cell phone dual-purpose antenna;

SUN VISORS (fig. 140)

– magnetic card or toll ticket holder (C);The passenger’s sun visor has a symbol
concerning correct use of a child’s seat in thepresence of the passenger’s air bag. For further details, refer to the passenger’s front
air bag paragraph.

– pen or pencil holder (D);– coin holder (E).

The mobile phone provision consists of:– connection and supply cables with specific connector for connecting hands-free kit.

The voice kit should bepurchased by the customer
as it must be compatible
with the customer’s phone.

A0A0751b

A0A0121b

For the installation of acell phone and connection
to the provision in the car,
contact only Alfa Romeo Authorised Services; this will guarantee
first-rate results with no possibility of any inconvenience that may
compromise the safety of the car.

Alfawiki.nl

126 fig. 139

fig. 140

Electric/electronic devices installed after
buying the car or in aftermarket shall bear
the and marking:Fiat Auto S.p.A. authorizes the installationof transceivers provided that installation iscarried out at a specialized shop, workmanlike performed and in compliance with
manufacturer’s specifications.
IMPORTANT Installation of devices resulting in modifications of car characteristics
may cause driving license seizing by traffic
agents and also the lapse of the warranty
as concerns defects due to the abovementioned modification or traceable back to it
directly or indirectly.
Fiat Auto S.p.A. declines all responsibility
for damages caused by the installation of
non-genuine accessories or not recommended by Fiat Auto S.p.A. and installed
not in compliance with the specified requirements.

RADIO
TRANSMITTERS
AND CELLULARTELEPHONES
Mobile phones and other radio transceiver equipment (e.g.: HAM radio systems andthe like) shall not be used inside the car unless a separate aerial is mounted.
IMPORTANT The use of mobile phones,
HAM radio systems or other similar devices
inside the passenger compartment (without
separate aerial) may cause electronic systems equipping the car to malfunction. This
could compromise safety in addition to constituting a potential hazard for the passengers.

ACCESSORIESPURCHASED BY
THE OWNER
If after buying the car, you decide to installelectrical accessories that require a permanent electric supply (alarm, voice feature,radionavigator with satellite antitheft, etc.)
or accessories that in any case burden theelectric supply, contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services, whose qualified personnel,
besides suggesting the most suitable devices
belonging to Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo, will
also evaluate the overall electric absorption,
checking whether the car electric system isable to withstand the load required, orwhether it needs to be integrated with amore powerful battery.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

INSTALLATION OF
ELECTRIC/ELECTRONIC
DEVICESIn addition, transmission and reception ofthese devices may be affected by the shielding effect of the car body.
As concerns the use of mobile phones(GSM, GPRS, UMTS) withhomologation, keep strictly to the mobile phone manufacturer’s specifications.

Alfawiki.nl

127

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

BOOTOPENING FROM INSIDE(fig. 141)OPENING WITH REMOTE
CONTROL (fig. 142)

The tailgate can be opened:

Tailgate is released electrically and this canbe performed only when the ignition key
is in position MAR with car at a standstillor in STOP or PARK position for 3 minutes without unlocking/locking one of thedoors.

The tailgate can be opened by remote control from outside pressing the button (A),also when the electronic alarm is engaged.
Opening of the tailgate is accompanied bya double flash of the direction indicators;
closing is accompanied by a single flash.

To unlock the tailgate, press button (A)on the centre console panel.

If an electronic alarm is fitted, with the
opening of the tailgate, the alarm systemswitches off volumetric protection and thetailgate control sensor, the system “beeps”
twice (with the exception of certain markets).

from the outside of the car - by aremote control impulse;from the inside of the door - by depressing the button (A-fig. 141).
IMPORTANT If the boot is not properly shut, the ´ warning light will come on(on certain versions accompanied by themessage on the reconfigurable multifunction
display).

A0A0129b

Tailgate raising is facilitated by the gas
shock springs.

The gas springs are calibrated to ensure correct
tailgate raising with theweights foreseen by the manufacturer. The arbitrary addition of
items (such spoilers, etc.) may
compromise the correct operationand safety of the actual tailgate.

A0A0636b

Alfawiki.nl

128 fig. 141

fig. 142TAILGATE CLOSING
To lock, push in correspondence with the
Alfa Romeo badge to lower tailgate, until
you feel the click of the lock.

BOOT LIGHT (fig. 143)
When the tailgate is opened the light turns
on automatically (A) in the right-hand sideof the boot. Closing the tailgate, the lightturns off automatically.
IMPORTANT Turning the ignition key to
STOP, opening the tailgate, turning on thelight will only be possible for 15 minutes;
after which the system turns it off to avoid
draining the battery.

EMERGENCY OPENING
OF TAILGATE
To succeed in opening the tailgate from theinside, should the car battery be flat, or because of a defect of the electric lock of the
tailgate itself, proceed as follows (see “Extending the luggage compartment” in thechapter “Getting to know you car”):– tilt the rear seat cushions;– tilt the backrests;– unlock the lock by pulling the string (Afig. 144) (the string is located inside theright recess in the tailgate).

A0A0637b

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Closing the tailgate again, the control functions are restored, the system “beeps” twice(with the exception of certain markets).

A0A0658b

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 143

fig. 144

129

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

SECURING THE LOAD (fig. 145)
The loads carried may be secured withstraps hooked to the special rings (A) in theboot.
The rings also serve for fastening the luggage restrainer, if present (in any case available c/o Alfa Romeo Authorised Services).

CAUTIONS FOR CARRYINGLUGGAGE
Travelling at night with a load in the bootit is necessary to adjust the height of the low
beam headlights (see next paragraph“Headlights” in this chapter). For correct useof the aiming device, also make sure thatthe load does not exceed the values givenin the same paragraph.

gers.

Do not load the bootabove the permitted maximum (see “Technical specifications”). Also make sure thatthe objects contained in the bootare well secured to prevent themfrom being thrown forward, causing harm to the passengers.

If you want to carry reserve fuel in a can, follow
legal regulations, only using a certified can, suitably fastened to the load securing eyelets.
Even in this way the risk of fire isincreased in the case of an accident.

A0A0638b

Alfawiki.nl

130 fig. 145

A heavy load that has notbeen secured may cause
serious harm to passen-

The bonnet opening lever is under the left
end of the dashboard.
To open:– pull the lever (A-fig. 146) until thebonnet clicks open.
– press the safety lever (A-fig. 147)
upwards.

Carry out this operation
only with the car stationary.
DANGER-SERIOUS INJURY. When carrying out
checks or maintenance operations in the engine compartment, take special care not to bumpthe head on the raised bonnet.

– raise the bonnet.
IMPORTANT Bonnet raising is aided by
two gas springs. Do not tamper with these
springs and accompany the bonnet whileraising it.

If checks need to be carried out in the engine compartment when the engine
is still warm, keep away from the
fan as it could start up even when
the key is removed from the ignition. Wait until the engine cools
down.

A0A0135b

A0A0707b

Scarves, ties and loose
clothing may be caught inthe moving parts.

For safety reasons thebonnet must be closed
properly to avoid its opening while the car is travelling.
Therefore, always check it is properly closed and the catch engaged.
Should you notice that the catch is
not perfectly engaged when travelling, stop the car immediately andclose the bonnet.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

BONNET

To close:– lower the bonnet until approx. 20 cm
from the engine compartment and then let
it drop, ensuring it is fully closed and not justheld in position by the safety catch.
If the bonnet does not close properly do
not push it down but open it again and repeat the above procedure.

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 146

fig. 147

131

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARHEADLIGHTSCOMPENSATION FOR TILT
(fig. 148)

For the required adjustment (only with low
beams on), use buttons ▲/▼:

The adjustment of the headlights is vital toyour safety and comfort and to that of other road users.

When the car is loaded, the beam from theheadlights is raised due to the backwards
tilt of the car.

– press button ▲, to increase by one position (e.g.: 0 ➟ 1 ➟ 2 ➟ 3);

The adjustment of the headlights is also
governed by precise regulations.

In this case the headlights must be adjusted correctly.

Contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services tohave the headlights correctly adjusted.
IMPORTANT The headlight inner surface may get slightly misted: this does notmean it is faulty; it is a natural phenomenon due to low temperature and the air humidity level. Misting will disappear as soon
as the headlights are turned on. The presence of water drops inside the headlight indicates water infiltration: contact Alfa Romeo
Authorised Services.

A0A1106b

Alfawiki.nl

132

fig. 148– press button ▼, to decrease by one position (e.g.: 3 ➟ 2 ➟ 1 ➟ 0);
The display (A), in the tachometer shows
positions during adjustment.

– position 0: one or two people occupying the front seats

IMPORTANT Xenon headlights aiming
is automatic, versions with this optional are
therefore not fitted with headlight aiming
device.

– position 1: five people;– position 2: five people + load in theboot;– position 3: driver + 350 Kg load all
stowed in luggage compartment
Check beam aiming every
time the load carriedchanges.

HEADLIGHT ADJUSTMENTABROAD (fig. 149-150)
The dipped-beam headlights are adjusted
for circulation in the country in which the car
is marketed. In countries with opposite circulation, to avoid glaring oncoming vehicles
it is necessary to cover the area of the headlights as shown below; this is done using
non-transparent sticker tape.
The illustrations refer to passing from righthand drive to left-hand drive.

A0A0199b

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Correct positions as a function of the load:

A0A0750b

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 149

fig. 150

133

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

ABS(on request for versions/markets
where applicable)
The car is fitted with an ABS braking system, which prevents the wheels from locking when braking, makes full use of the grip
and within the limits of the grip available,
keeps the car controllable also in emergency
braking.
When braking a slight pulsing accompanied by noise may be felt on the brake pedal due to the action of the ABS system.
This should not be interpreted as a braking malfunction. It is the signal to the driverthat the ABS has come into action: it is thewarning that the car is travelling at the limit of its grip and therefore the speed should
be adapted to the type of road.
The ABS system is an additional part of thebase braking system; in the event of a failure it is disabled, leaving the braking system in the same conditions as a car without
ABS.

If you have never previously used cars fitted with ABS, it is advisable to practice a little on a slippery surface, naturally in safety conditions and in accordance with the local Highway Code; you are also advised toread the following instructions carefully.
The advantage of the ABS over a conventional system is that it makes it possible to obtain the highest degree of handling also whenbraking completely under limited grip conditions, preventing the wheels from locking.
However, with the ABS do not expect thebraking distance to always shorten: for example, on soft surfaces like gravel or fresh
snow or a slippery surface, the space might
increase.

If the ABS cuts in it meansthat the limit of the grip isbeing reached between thetyre and the road surface: it istherefore necessary to slow down
to adapt driving to the grip available.

To better exploit the possibilities of the anti-lock system in the case of need, the advice given below should be followed.
In the event of a system
failure, with the turning onof the > warning light on
the instrument cluster, have the carchecked immediately by Alfa
Romeo Authorised Services, to beable to have the system restored
to fully efficient conditions.

In the case of a failure, the anti-lock action
is no longer present, the braking capacity of
the car is not adversely affected at all.

Alfawiki.nl

134

The ABS better exploits
the grip available, but cannot increase it; caution istherefore necessary on slippery
surfaces, without taking unnecessary risks.

The most important advice of all, however, is this:When the ABS cuts in, andyou feel the pulsing on thepedal, do not lighten thepressure, but keep the pedal firmly pressed with no fear; this way
you will stop in the least spacepossible, compatibly with the conditions of the road surface.

Following these instructions you will bein the best braking condition under all circumstances.
IMPORTANT Cars fitted with ABS may
only be fitted with the wheel rims, tyres andbrake linings of type and brand approved by
the Manufacturer.
The system is completed by the EBD (Electronic Brake Distributor) which distributes
the braking action through the control unit
and the ABS system sensors.

If the compact spare
wheel is used, operation of
the ABS system is cut off
and the > warning light on the instrument cluster turns on.

The car is fitted with anelectronic braking distributor (EBD). If the > and x
warning lights turn on simultaneously with the engine running, thisindicates an EBD system failure; inthis case with sharp braking therear wheels might lock too early,
with the possibility of skidding. Driving extremely carefully, go to thenearest Alfa Romeo Authorised Service to have the system checked.

IMPORTANT If the battery is run down
the > and x warning lights might turn on
when starting the engine and go off after
starting. This should not be considered asa fault but as a warning that during starting the ABS is not active. The turning offof the warning lights ensures normal system
operation.

The turning on of only the> warning light with theengine running normally indicates a fault to the ABS system
only. In this case the braking system is still efficient, though without the aid of the anti-lock device.
Under these conditions performance of the EBD system may be
reduced. In this case too, you areadvised to go immediately to thenearest Alfa Romeo Authorised
Service to have the system checked
over, driving in such a way as to
avoid sharp braking.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Always take due care when braking on
bends, even with the help of the ABS.

If the low brake fluid level x warning light turns
on, stop the car immediately and contact the nearest Alfa
Romeo Authorised Service. Anyloss of fluid from the hydraulic system will negatively affect the operation of the braking system be itof the conventional type or of thetype with ABS.

Alfawiki.nl

135

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

VDC SYSTEM(Vehicle Dynamics Control)(on request for versions/markets where applicable)

When the sensors detect the conditions
that would lead to skidding, the system intervenes on the engine and on the brakes
producing a stabilising torque.

System is engaged automatically when the
car is started and cannot be switched off.
The basic components of the system are:

The VDC is an electronic system that controls car stability, intervening on the driving
torque and braking the wheels in a differentiated manner, in the lack of grip, it helps
to bring the car back to the correct direction.
When travelling the car is subjected to lateral and longitudinal forces which can becontrolled by the driver as long as the tyresoffer adequate roadholding; when this falls
below the minimum level, the car begins
to divert from the course required by the driver.
Especially when travelling on an unevensurface (such as paving, or due to the presence of water, ice or soil), changes in speed(acceleration or braking) and/or course(bends or the need to avoid obstacles) may
cause the tyres to lose grip.

The performance of thesystem, in terms of active
safety should not induce
the driver to take pointless and unnecessary risks. The style of driving must in any case always be
adapted to the conditions of theroad surface, visibility and traffic.
The responsibility for road safety
is always and in any case the driver’s.

System helps the driver to keep the car under control in the event of a loss of tyre grip.
The forces induced by the system to control the loss of car stability always dependon the grip between the tyre and the roadsurface.

Alfawiki.nl

136

HOW THE VDCSYSTEM WORKS– an electronic control unit that processes the signals received from the various sensors and brings about the most appropriate
strategy;– a sensor that detects the position of thesteering wheels;– four sensors that detect the turning
speed of each wheel;– a sensor that detects rotation of the cararound its vertical axis;– a sensor that detects lateral acceleration(centrifugal force).
The heart of the system is the control unit,
which with the data supplied by the sensors
installed on the car calculates the centrifugal
forces generated when the car is cornering.
The yawing sensor, which originates from theaeronautical industry, detects the rotationsof the car around its own vertical axis. The
centrifugal forces generated when the car
is cornering are detected by a highly sensitive lateral acceleration sensor.

The control unit processes the information
received from the sensors and therefore isable to know the position of the car instantby instant and compares it with the course
the driver would like to follow. In the eventof a discrepancy, in a fraction of a second
the control unit chooses and commands themost suitable intervention to bring the car
immediately back to the required course:
braking one or more wheels at different intensity and, if necessary, reducing the power transmitted by the engine.

CUTTING IN
OF THE VDC SYSTEM
The cutting in of the system is indicated by
the flashing of the áwarning light on the
instrument cluster, to inform the driver thatthe car is in critical conditions of stability and
grip.

During use of the compact
spare wheel, the VDC system continues working. It
should be borne in mind that thespare wheel is smaller than a normal tyre, therefore its grip is lower than that of the other tyres of
the car.

VDC system failure warning
In the event of a failure the system disengages automatically and the á warning
light on the instrument cluster turns on glowing steadily, together with the message on
the reconfigurable multifunction display.
In the event of an system failure the car
behaves like a car not fitted with this system: in any case it is advisable to contact
Alfa Romeo Authorised Services as soon as
possible.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

The stabilising action of the system isbased on the calculations of the system electronic control unit, which processes the signals received from the steering wheel rotation sensor, acceleration sensor and rotation
speed sensor of each wheel. These signals
allow the control unit to recognise the manoeuvre the driver intends to do when thesteering wheel is turned.

For the VDC system towork correctly, the tyres
must be of the same brandand type on all wheels, in perfectconditions and above all of thespecified type, brand and size.

The corrective actions are modified andcontrolled continuously in seeking the course
required by the driver.
The action of system considerably enhances the active safety of the car in very
critical situations and it is particularly helpful when the grip conditions of the road surface change.

Alfawiki.nl

137

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARASR SYSTEM(Antislip Regulation)(on request for versions/markets where applicable)

The action of the ASR is particularly helpful in the following circumstances:

SWITCHING ON
THE ASR FUNCTION– slipping of the inner wheel on a bend,
due to the effect of dynamic load changes
or excessive acceleration.

The ASR function switches on automatically each time the engine is started.

The ASR function controls the car drive andcuts in automatically every time one or bothdriving wheels slip.

– too much power transmitted to thewheels also in relation to the conditions of
the road safety.

In slipping conditions, tow different control
systems are activated:– acceleration on slippery, snowy or frozen
surfaces.

1) if slipping involves both driving wheels,
being caused by excessive power transmitted, the ASR device cuts in reducing the power transmitted by the engine.

– in the case of loss of grip on a wet surface (aquaplaning).

2) if slipping involves only one driving
wheel, the ASR system cuts in automatically braking the wheel that is slipping, with
an effect similar to that of a self-locking differential.

When travelling the ASR can be switched
off and on again pressing switch (A-fig.
151).
When the function is turned off, the instrument panel warning light V turns on.
If the function is switched off when travelling, it will turn on again automatically thenext time the engine is started.

The performance of thesystem in terms of active
safety should not induce
the driver to take pointless and unnecessary risks. The style of driving must in any case be adapted
to the conditions of the road surface, visibility and traffic. Road
surface is always the driver’s responsibility.

A0A1107b

Alfawiki.nl

138

fig. 151

For correct operation of
the ASR system, the tyres
must absolutely be of thesame brand and type on all wheels,in perfect conditions and, above all,of type, brand and size specified.

ASR system
failure indications

MSR SYSTEM (engine braking
torque control)

In the event of a fault, the ASR systemswitches off automatically and the V warning light on the instrument cluster turns on,
together with the message on the reconfigurable multifunction display.

The car is fitted with a special system, integral with the ASR system, that in case of
sudden gear shifting, cuts in providing torqueto the engine thus preventing excessive driving wheel drive that, specially in poor grip
conditions, can lead to loss of stability.

In the event of an ASR system operating
failure, the car behaves in the same way
as a car that is not fitted with this system:in any case, it is advisable to contact Alfa
Romeo Authorised Services as soon as possible.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

During use of the compact
spare wheel, the ASR function is cut off and the V
warning light on the instrument
cluster turns on glowing steadily
together with the message on thereconfigurable multifunction display.

IMPORTANT When travelling on snowy
roads with snow chains, it may be helpful
to turn the ASR off: in fact, in these conditions, slipping of the driving wheels whenmoving off makes it possible to obtain better drive.

Alfawiki.nl

139

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

EOBD SYSTEM(upon request for versions/markets where applicable)
The EOBD system (European On Board Diagnosis) allows continuous diagnosis of thecomponents of the car correlated with emissions.
It also alerts the driver, by turning on thewarning light U on the instrument panel(on certain versions together with message+ symbol on the reconfigurable multifunction display), when these components are
no longer in peak conditions.
The objective is:– to keep the system efficiency under control;– to warn when a fault causes emissions
levels to increase;

The system also has a diagnostic connector that can be interfaced with appropriate
tools, which makes it possible to read theerror codes stored in the control unit, together with a series of specific parameters
for engine operation and diagnosis. This
check can also be carried out by the traffic
police.

If, turning the ignition key
to MAR, the warning light
U does not turn on or if,
while travelling it turns on glowing steadily or flashing (on someversions together with the message + symbol on the reconfigurable multifunction display), contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services as soon as possible.

– to warn of the need to replace deteriorated components.

Alfawiki.nl

140

IMPORTANT After eliminating the inconvenience, to check the system completely, Alfa Romeo Authorised Services are
obliged to run a bench test and, if necessary,road tests which may also call for a long journey.

The car sound system, fitted with CD player (radio with Compact Disc player) or MP3
CD player (radio with MP3 CD player) has
been designed in accordance with the special features of the passenger compartment,with a personalised design that blends withthe style of the dashboard. The sound system cannot be adapted to other vehicles andfor this reason it cannot be removed.

The radio is installed in a user-friendly position for the driver and passenger and thegraphics on the front panel make locationof the controls quick, facilitating use.
The CD Changer is available at Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo.
In the following pages you will find the
instructions for use, which you are advised
to read through carefully. The instructions also contain the procedure for controlling the
CD Changer (if provided) through the radio.
For the instructions for use of the CD Changer refer to the specific manual.

ADVICERoad safety
You are advised to learn how to use thevarious radio functions (e.g.: storing stations) before starting to drive.
Reception conditions
Reception conditions change constantly
when driving. Reception may be disturbed
by the presence of mountains, buildings orbridges particularly when far away from thestation being listened to.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

SOUND SYSTEMIMPORTANT When receiving traffic information, the volume may be higher thannormal.

Alfawiki.nl

141

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Too high a volume whendriving can put the driver’s
life at risk and that of other people. Therefore the volume
should always be adjusted in sucha way that it is always possible tohear the noises of the surrounding
environment (e.g.: horns, ambulance, police sirens, etc.).

Care and maintenance

Compact DiscThe radio structure ensures long operation
with no need for particular maintenance.
In the event of a fault, contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services.

Remember that dirt, marks or distortion on
Compact Disc can cause skipping. To obtain
optimum playing conditions we give the following advice:

To clean the front panel only use a soft,
antistatic cloth. Cleaning and polishing products might spoil the surface.

– Only use Compact Discs which have thefollowing brand:– Carefully clean all Compact Discs of fingerprints and dust using a soft cloth. Support Compact Discs from the outer circumference and clean from the centre outwards;– Never use chemical products for cleaning (e.g.: spray cans, antistatic or thinners)
as they might damage the surface of Compact Discs;– After use, put Compact Discs back intheir container, to avoid marks or scratches
that may cause skipping when playing;– Do not expose Compact Discs to direct
sunlight, high temperatures or damp for prolonged lengths of time to prevent them frombending;

Alfawiki.nl

142– Do not stick labels or write on the recorded surface of Compact Discs.

Do not use highly scratched, cracked, or
distorted discs, etc. The use of these discs
will involve malfunctioning or damage to theplayer.

Always hold Compact Discs by the outercircumference. Never touch the surface.

For optimal playing use original CDs only.
Regular operation is not guaranteed if using
R/RW CDs not properly mastered and/or
CDs with max. capacity higher than 650
MB.

To remove fingerprints and dust, use a soft
cloth starting from the centre of the Compact Disc outwards.

IMPORTANT Do not use the protective
sheets for CD in commerce or discs with stabilisers, etc. as they might get stuck in theinternal mechanism and damage the disc.

IMPORTANT Should copy-protected CDs
be used, then, few seconds may be requiredfor playing them. Moreover, due to the proliferation of always new and different protection methods, it is not guaranteed that
the CD player can play whatever protecteddisc. Copy protection is often indicated on
the CD cover in small letters or hard to readcharacters. Usually it is indicated by writings
like: “COPY CONTROL”, “COPY PROTECTED”, “THIS CD CANNOT BE PLAYED ON A
PC/MAC”, or it is identified by symbols like:

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

To remove a Compact Disc from its container, press the centre and raise the disccarefully, holding it by the outer circumference.

Alfawiki.nl

143

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Protected discs (and their cover) very often are not marked with the audio CD identification symbol:

IMPORTANT The CD player can readmost of the compression systems currently
on sale (e.g.: LAME, BLADE, XING, FRAUNHOFER) however, due to the evolution ofthese systems, reading of all compression
formats is not guaranteed.
IMPORTANT When loading a multi-session CD, only the first session will be played.

TECHNICAL DATA
Radio
Maximum power: 4 x 30W.
AerialThe aerial is located on the car roof. You
are recommended to slacken and remove
the aerial from the roof to avoid damaging
it when washing the car in automatic system.
Speakers
The sound system is formed of a systemcomprising:– 4 tweeters: 2 front and 2 rear (for versions/markets where applicable) with 30W
power– 4 speakers with a diameter of 165 mm(2 front and 2 rear) with 40W power.

Alfawiki.nl

144

The radio has a 10A fuse located in therear part of the set. To replace the fuse, theradio needs to be pulled out: therefore contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

HI-FI BOSE SYSTEM(for versions/markets whereapplicable)
The HI-FI BOSE system installed on yourcar has been accurately designed to offer
outstanding sound quality and reproduce themusical realism of a live concert, for all theseats in the passenger compartment.
The system’s features include outstanding
faithful reproduction of crystalline treble
tones and full, rich basses which among other things, make the Loudness function superfluous. In addition, the complete rangeof the sounds is reproduced in the whole passenger compartment enveloping the occupants with the natural spatial sensation thatis felt when listening to live music.

Technical information
System comprises:– 4 high efficiency woofers with diameter
165 mm, two at the front and two at theback, each having a coaxial tweeter inside;– 1 bass box with a volume of 12 dm3
housed on the left-hand side of the boot;– 1 high power HI-FI amplifier (150W)
with 6 channels, analogue equalising in amplitude signal phase and with 130 mm diameter sub-woofer.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Protection fuse

The components adopted are patented andare the result of the most sophisticated technology, but at the same time they are easy
and intuitive to use, so that even less expert
people can use the system.

Alfawiki.nl

145

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARCONTROLS ON FRONT PANEL

Audio section– Loudness function (excluding versions
with Bose HI-FI system)– Standard equalization (excluding versions with Bose HI-FI system)– Personal equalization (excluding versions with Bose HI-FI system)– Automatic volume changing according
to car speed– MUTE function

fig. 152

A0A1113b

Radio section– Traffic information reception (TA)– Automatic storage of 6 stations in the
dedicated FM band - FMT (AS – Autostore)

ButtonGENERAL FUNCTIONS

Mode

ON

On

Short push on button

OffLong push on button

VOL+
VOL

146

CD / CD MP3 section– Play / Pause– Previous / next track selection– FF / FR– Previous / next directory selection

Press button

Volume up
Volume down

Alfawiki.nl

Press button

GENERAL FUNCTIONS

Mode

FM AS

Radio band selection FM1, FM2, FM Autostore

Brief cyclic button pressing

AM

Radio band selection MW, LW

Brief cyclic button pressing

CD

Audio source selection (radio/CD/CD-Changer)

Brief cyclic button pressing

MUTE

Volume on/off (MUTE / PAUSE)

Brief button pressing

AUD

Audio settings: bass (BASS), treble (TREBLE),
right/left sound adjustment (BALANCE),
front/rear sound adjustment (FADER)

Menu activation: brief button pressing
Adjustment selection: press button ▲ or ▼Value adjustment: press button ÷ or ˜

MENU

Advanced functions adjustment

Menu activation: brief button pressing
Adjustment selection: press button ▲ or ▼Value adjustment: press button ÷ or ˜

ButtonRADIO FUNCTIONSModeRadio station tuning:• Automatic tuning• Manual tuning

Automatic tuning: press button ÷ or ˜(long pressing for fast forward)
Manual tuning: press button ▲ or ▼(long pressing for fast forward)

Current radio station storage

Long button pressing
respectively for preset/memories from 1 to 6

Stored station recall

Brief button pressing
respectively for preset/memories from 1 to 6

ButtonCD FUNCTIONS

Mode

˚

CD ejection

Brief button pressing÷ ˜

Previous/next track playback

Brief pressing on buttons ÷ or ˜

CD track fast forward/backward

Long pressing on buttons ÷ or ˜▲▼Previous/next CD playback (for CD Changer)▲÷ ˜▼123456

Previous/next directory playback (for MP3 CD)

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

ButtonAlfawiki.nlBrief pressing on buttons ▲ or ▼Brief pressing on buttons ▲ or ▼147

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

148

STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS(where provided)

fig. 153

A0A1114b

ButtonFUNCTION

Modez

Audio Mute on/off(with sound system on)

Brief button pressing+

Volume up

Press button–

Volume down

Press button

SRC

Radio frequency(FM1, FM2, FMT, MW, LW) and audio source(Radio - CD - MP3 - CD Changer) selection button

Press buttonôRadio: recall preset stations (1 to 6)
MP3: select next directory
CD Changer: select next CD in the CD Changer

Press buttonóRadio: recall preset stations (6 to 1)
Alfawiki.nl
MP3: select previous directory
CD Changer: select previous CD in the CD Changer

Press button

Compact Disc section

CD MP3 section

The set possesses the following functions:– Direct disc selection;– Directory selection (previous/next);– Track selection (forward/backward);– Track selection (forward/backward);– Fast forward/backward;– Fast forward/backward;– CD Display function: displaying CD
name/time elapsed from start of track;– MP3 DISP function: directory name, ID3tag info, time elapsed from start of track,
file name);Radio section– PLL tuning with FM/AM/MW/LW frequency bands;– RDS (Radio Data System) with TA (traffic announcements) - TP (Program Type) EON (Enhanced Other Network) - REG (Regional programmes);– AF: alternative frequency search selection in RDS mode;– emergency alarm presetting;– automatic/manual station tuning;– FM Multipath detector;– manual storage of 36 stations: 18 in
the FM band (6 in FM1, 6 in FM2, 6 inFMT), 6 in the MW band and 6 in the LW
band;– Playing audio CDs and R/RW CDs.

– Playing audio CDs and R/RW CDs.
On multimedia CDs in addition to sound tracks also
data tracks are recorded.
Playing one of these CDs may
cause rustling and such a volume
as to compromise road safety, as
well as causing damage to the final stages and speakers.

Audio section– Mute/Pause function;

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

GENERAL– Soft Mute function;– Loudness function (excluding versions
with Bose HI-FI system);– 7 band graphic equalizer (excluding versions with Bose HI-FI system);– Separate bass/treble adjustment;– Right/left channel balancing.

– automatic storage (Autostore function)of 6 stations in FM band;– SVC function (excluding versions with
Bose HI-FI system): automatic volume adjustment with car speed;– automatic Stereo/Mono switching.

Alfawiki.nl

149

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

FUNCTIONS AND
ADJUSTMENTS

Selecting CD/CD Changerfunctions

Turning the sound system on The set isswitched on pressing button ON.

Pressing briefly and repeatedly button CD
it is possible to select the following audio
sources in sequence:

When turning the sound system on, thevolume level will be brought to 20 if it was
set to over.
If the radio is turned on when the key is
not fitted into the ignition device, it will turnoff automatically after about 20 minutes.
After automatic switching off, it is however
possible to turn the radio on again for other 20 minutes by pressing button ON (seeparagraph “IGN TIME function”).
Turning the sound system off
Keep button ON pressed.
Selecting radio functions
Pressing briefly and repeatedly button
FMAS it is possible to select the following
functions in sequence:– CD (only if the Compact Disc is inserted);– CHANGER (only if the CD Changer is connected).
Audio source memory function
If while listening to a CD another function
is selected (e.g.: the radio), playing is
stopped and when the CD mode is resumed,
it starts again from the point in which it was
stopped.
If while listening to the radio another function is selected, when the Radio mode isresumed, it is tuned to the last station selected.

– TUNER (“FM1”, “FM2”, “FMT”);
Pressing briefly and repeatedly button AM
it is possible to select the following functions
in sequence:– TUNER (“MW”, “LW”).

Alfawiki.nl

150

Volume adjustment
Adjust volume through VOL + and VOL buttons.
If the volume level is changed during thebroadcast of a traffic bulletin, the new setting is maintained only until the end of thebulletin.
SVC function(excluding versions with
Bose HI-FI system)
The SVC function makes it possible to automatically adapt the volume level to the
speed of the car, increasing it as the speed
increases to maintain the ratio with the noiselevel inside the passenger compartment.
See section MENU for activating/deactivating this function.

To switch on the Mute function, briefly
press the button MUTE. Volume will gradually lower and the display will show the word
“MUTE” (when in radio mode) or “PAUSE”(when in CD or CD-Changer mode).
To switch off the Mute function, press the
button MUTE again. Volume will gradually
become louder returning to the value set before switching on the Mute function.
Changing volume will deactivate the Mutefunction and the volume will be set to the
new level selected.
With the Mute function on:– if an emergency alarm or a traffic bulletin arrives with the TA function on, the message ignores the Mute function. The Mutefunction will be resumed at the end of thetraffic announcement.

Audio adjustments
The options proposed by the audio menu
differ according to the audio source selected: AM/FM/CD/CDC.
To change Audio functions, press briefly
button AUD. The display will show “BASS”.
To scroll the Menu options, use buttons ▲or ▼. To change the setting of the option
selected, press buttons ÷ or ˜.
The display will show the current statusof the function selected.
The functions controlled by the menu are
the following:– BASS (bass adjustment);– TREBLE (treble adjustment);– BALANCE (right/left balance);– FADER (excluding versions with Bose HIFI system) (front/rear balance);– LD (excluding versions with Bose HI-FI
system) (Loudness on/off);– PRESET (excluding versions with Bose
HI-FI system) (standard equalization activation and selection);

Tone adjustment(bass/treble)
Proceed as follows:– Use button ▲ or ▼ to select “BASS” or“TREBLE” in the AUDIO menu;– press button ÷ or ˜ to increase/decrease the basses or trebles.
Pressing the buttons briefly the change is
gradual by steps. Pressing longer, changing is faster.
Balance adjustment

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Mute /pause function(turning off the volume
completely)

Proceed as follows:– Use button ▲ or ▼ to select “BALANCE” in the AUDIO menu;– press button ÷ to increase the soundfrom the right speakers or button ˜ toincrease the sound from the left speakers.
Pressing the buttons briefly the change is
gradual by steps. Pressing longer, changing is faster.
Select “÷ 0 ˜” to set the same value for both right and left speakers.

– XX USER (personal equalization setting).

Alfawiki.nl

151

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Fader adjustment
Proceed as follows:– Use button ▲ or ▼ to select “FADER”
in the AUDIO menu;– press button ÷ to increase the soundfrom the rear speakers or button ˜ to increase the sound from the front speakers.
Pressing the buttons briefly the change is
gradual by steps. Pressing longer, changing is faster.
Select “÷ 0 ˜” to set the same value for both front and rear speakers.
LD function
The Loudness function improves the soundvolume when listening at low level, increasing the basses and trebles.
To switch the function on/off, use button▲ or ▼ to select “LD” in the AUDIO menu.
The function condition (on or off) is shownon the display for few seconds by “LD ON”
or “LD OFF”.

PRESET/XX EQ SET*/CLASSIC/
ROCK/JAZZ functions(equalizer on/off)
The integrated equalizer can be turned on
or off. With the equalizer off, it is possible
to change the sound settings only adjusting the bass (“BASS”) and treble tones(“TREBLE”), while activating the function
makes it possible to adjust the sound curves.
To turn the equalizer off, select “PRESET”
by means of button ÷ or ˜.
To turn the equalizer on, use button ÷or ˜ to select one of the following options:– “USER” (adjustment of the 7 equalizer bands that can be changed by the user);– “CLASSIC” (predefined equalizer adjustment for best playing of classic music);– “ROCK” (predefined equalizer adjustment for best playing of rock and pop music);– “JAZZ” (predefined equalizer adjustment for best playing of jazz music).
When one of the equalizer settings is on,
the display shows “EQ”.

Alfawiki.nl

152*XX EQ SET function (only if the
USER equalizer setting has been
selected) (excluding versions
with Bose HI-FI system)
To set a personal equalizer adjustment, usebutton ▲ or ▼ to select USER and thenpress button ▼ for long.
The display will show for about 2 seconds“XX EQ SET” and then a graph with 7 bars,
where each bar represents a frequency.
Choose the bar to be adjusted using button
÷ or ˜; the bar chosen starts to flash
and it is possible to adjust it using button ▲or ▼.
To store the new settings, press button
AUD again or wait for about 10 seconds.
The display will show the word “MEN” together with the graph with 7 bars.
Antitheft protection
Refer to “CD Player” paragraph.

Introduction
When the set is turned on the last function
selected before turning off is played (Radio,
CD or CD Changer).
To select the Tuner source while listening
to another audio source, press briefly buttons FMAS or AM, according to the required
frequency band.

Each band is shown by the respective
wording on the display.
The last station selected in the respective
frequency band will be tuned.
The FM band is divided into sections: FM1,
FM2 and FMT. The FMT reception band isreserved to the stations stored automaticallywith the Autostore function.
Presetting buttons

When Tuner is on, the display will show
the selected station name (RDS stations only) (or frequency), the frequency band (e.g.:FM1) and the preselection button number(e.g.: P1).

The buttons with symbols from 1 to 6
make it possible to set the following presettings:

Selecting the frequency band– 6 in the MW band;

If in the Tuner mode, briefly and repeatedly press button FMAS or AM to select therequired frequency band.

– 6 in the LW band;

Every time the button is pressed the following bands are selected in sequence:– Pressing button FMAS: “FM1”, “FM2”,“FMT”;– 18 in the FM band (6 in FM1, 6 inFM2, 6 in FMT);

Storing the last station heard
The radio automatically keeps in storage
the last station heard for each reception
band, which is then tuned when the radio isturned on or the reception band is changed.
Automatic tuning
Briefly press button ÷ or ˜ to start
automatically searching the tuning for the
next station that it is possible to receive inthe direction chosen.
If button ÷ or ˜ is pressed for
longer, quick searching takes place. Whenthe button is released, the tuner stops on
the next receivable station.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

RADIO (TUNER)

If the TA function is on (traffic information),
the tuner only searches stations which broadcast traffic bulletins.

To call a preset station, choose the required
frequency band and then press briefly thecorresponding preset button (from 1 to 6).
Pressing the respective preset button for
longer than 2 seconds will store the tuned
station. Storing is confirmed by a beep.

– Pressing button AM: “MW” and “LW”.

Alfawiki.nl

153

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Manual tuning
This allows manual station searching in thechosen band.
Select the required frequency band andthen press briefly and repeatedly button ▲or ▼ to start searching in the chosen band.
Pressing one of the buttons ▲ or ▼ longer
obtains fast forward searching, which is
stopped when the button is released.

A-STORE function(automatic station storage)
To switch on the A-STORE function, keep
button FMAS pressed until receiving the confirmation beep. With this function the radio automatically stores the six stations withthe strongest signal in decreasing order ofintensity of the FMT frequency band.

On buttons numbered from 1 to 6, the stations are automatically stored that give astrong signal in that moment in the present
band.

IMPORTANT Activating the A-STORE
function cancels the stations stored previously in the FMT band.

Activating the A-STORE function in MW or
LW bands will automatically select the FMTband where the function is then run.

If the TA function is on (traffic information),
only the stations that send traffic information will be stored.

IMPORTANT Sometimes the A-STORE
function is unable to find 6 stations with astrong signal. In this case the previous stations will be stored on the free preset buttons.

During automatic storage the display
shows “A-STORE”.
To interrupt A-STORE press button FMAS
again: the radio will automatically tune tothe station heard before activation of the AutoSTore function.

Alfawiki.nl

154

At the end of the A-STORE function the radio automatically tunes on the first preset
station in the FMT band stored on preset button 1.

In the RDS mode the radio is set to receive
emergency announcements in the case of
exceptional circumstances or events that
may cause general danger (earthquakes,
floods, etc.), if they are broadcast by thestation tuned.

EON function(Enhanced Other Network)
Certain countries have circuits which group
together several stations enabled to broadcast traffic information. In this case the programme of the station being heard will beinterrupted temporarily:

This function is activated automatically andcannot be deactivated.

– to receive traffic information (only with
TA function on);During emergency announcement the display will show the message “ALARM”. During this announcement the volume willchange as described for traffic announcements (see “TA Function”).

– to listen to regional programmes every
time these bulletins are given by one of thestations of the same circuits.
Stereophonic stations
If the signal received is weak, the device
switches automatically from Stereo to Mono.

MENU
MENU button functions
To activate the menu function, briefly press
button MENU. The display shows the word
“MENU”.
To scroll the menu functions use button ▲or ▼. To change the setting of the selected function use button ÷ or ˜.
The display will show the current statusof the function selected.
The functions controlled by the menu are
the following:

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Emergency alarm reception– AF (alternative frequency search);– TA (traffic information);– REG (regional programmes);– MP3 DISP (MP3 CD data display);– SVC (automatic volume control in relation to speed);– EXT VOL (external audio sources control);– IGN TIME (System power off mode radio);– DEFAULT (reset original settings).

Alfawiki.nl

To exit the menu function, press button
MENU again.

155

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

AF function(alternative frequency search)

TA function(traffic information)

Within the RDS system the radio can workin two different modes:

Certain stations in the FM band (FM1,FM2 and FMT) are enabled to also broadcast information about traffic conditions. In
this case the display shows “TP”.

– “AF ON”: alternative frequency searchon (the display shows “AF”);– “AF OFF”: alternative frequency search
off.
With “AF ON”, the radio is automaticallytuned to the station with the strongest signal that is broadcasting the same programme. During the journey it will thus bepossible to continue listening to the station
chosen without having to change the frequency when changing area.
Of course, the station being listened tomust be receivable in the area the car iscrossing.
To turn the AF function on/off, press button MENU, and then select “AF ON” or “AFOFF”. If the AF function has been turned on
the display shows “AF”.

To turn the TA (traffic announcement) function on/off, briefly press button MENU andthen select “TA ON” or “TA OFF”.
IMPORTANT If the TA function (traffic
information) is on, with CD, CD Changer (ifinstalled), Telephone or Mute/Pause active:
automatic station tuning will start.
With the TA function it is possible:– to search only RDS stations that transmit in the FM band, enabled to broadcast
traffic information;– to receive traffic information although
CD player or CD Changer are being used;– to receive traffic information at a predefined minimum volume even with the radio volume off.

If the radio is working in the AM band,
when the AF function is activated, it passes to the FM1 band on the last station selected.

Alfawiki.nl

156

IMPORTANT In certain countries radio
stations exist which, even if the TP function
is on (the display shows “TP”), do not transmit traffic information.
If the radio is working in the AM band,
when TA is activated, it passes to the FM1band on the last station heard.
The volume with which the traffic bulletin
is transmitted varies depending on the listening volume:– listening volume below 20: traffic bulletin volume = 20 (fixed value);– listening volume above 20: traffic bulletin volume = listening volume +1.
If the volume is changed during a trafficbulletin the value is not shown on the display and the new value is kept only for thebulletin in progress.
The TA function is interrupted by pressing
any sound system button.

The display will show the current statusof the function:

MP3 DISP function(MP3 CD data display)

Certain national broadcasters, at determinate times of the day, transmit regional programmes which differ from region to region.
This function makes it possible to tune in only on local stations (regional) (see paragraph “EON function”).

– “REG ON”: function on.

With this function it is possible to choose
the information shown on the display, when
listening to a MP3 CD.

Activate this function if you want to tune
automatically to regional stations broadcasting in the selected band.
To turn the function on/off use button
÷ or ˜.

– “REG OFF”: function off.
If the function is off and a regional programme is tuned that works in a determinate area and the car enters a different area,
the regional station of the new area is received.
IMPORTANT If AF and REG are both active, when passing from one region to another the radio could not tune properly toa valid alternative frequency.

This function can be selected only if a MP3
CD is loaded: in this event the display shows“MP3 DISP”.
To change the function use buttons ÷or ˜.
The display shows the setting among thesix possible:

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

REG function(regional broadcast reception)– TITLE (track title, if ID3-tag available)– AUTHOR (track author, if ID3-tag available)– ALBUM (album title, if ID3-tag available)– DIR (directory name);– FILENAME (MP3 file name);– TIME (time elapsed from start of track).

Alfawiki.nl

157

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

SVC function(volume changing with speed)(excluding versions with
Bose HI-FI system)

EXT function(external audio source control)
With this function it is possible to adjust(setting from 0 to 40) or exclude (OFF) external audio sources.

This function makes it possible to automatically adapt the volume level to the
speed of the car, increasing it as the speed
increases to maintain the ratio with the noiselevel inside the passenger compartment.

To turn this function on/off, use button
÷ or ˜.

RESTORE function

To turn the function on/off use button
÷ or ˜. The display will show the current status of the function:

The display will show the current statusof the function:– “EXT VOL”: function on.

This function enables to restore default settings. Options available are the following:– SVC OFF: function off– SVC LOW: function on(low sensitivity)– SVC HIGH: function on(high sensitivity).

– “EXT OFF”: function off.
– “EXT 23”: function on with volume level 23.
IGN TIME function(system power on/off mode radio)
This function enables to switch off thesound system according to two different
modes. To turn the function on use button
÷ or ˜.
The display will show “IGN TIME” and then:– “00 MIN”: deactivation dependent on
ignition key. Sound system will switch off
automatically when turning the ignition key
to STOP;

158

IMPORTANT When the sound systemis switched off automatically after turning
the ignition key to STOP (for both immediate or 20-minute delayed power off), it willswitch on automatically turning the ignition
key to MAR. If the sound system has beenswitched off pressing button ON, when turning the key to MAR it will stay off.

– “20 MIN”: deactivation independent of
ignition key. After having turned the ignition
Alfawiki.nl
key to STOP thesound system will stay on
for 20 minutes max.

– NO: no restore;– YES: restore default settings. During thisoperation the display will show the message“RESTORE”. At the end of this operation,
the audio source will not be changed andthe previous situation is displayed.

Selecting the compact disc player

Inserting/ejecting a CD

Introduction

To turn on the Compact Disc player integrated in the set, proceed as follows:

To insert the CD set it gently in place to activate the powered loading system, which
will position it correctly.

This section only describes CD player operation variants: as concerns sound system
operation, refer “Functions and adjustments” paragraph.

– insert a CD with the set on: the first track
will be played;or– if a CD is already inserted, turn the set
on and press briefly button CD to select“CD”: the last heard track will be played.
For optimal playing use only original CDs.
When using R/RW CDs, use top quality CDs
mastered at the as low as possible speed.

Press button ˚, with the device on, to operate the powered CD eject system. Afterejection, the source heard before playing the
CD will return.
If CD is not ejected, the device will reload
it automatically after about 20 seconds andthen will set to Tuner (Radio).
CD cannot be ejected if the device is off.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARCOMPACT DISC PLAYER

Inserting the ejected CD without fully removing it from the slot, the tuner will notchange the source to CD.

Alfawiki.nl

159

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Possible error messages
If the CD inserted is illegible (e.g.: CD-ROM
inserted, CD not inserted properly or reading error), the display will show the message “CD ERROR” for about 2 seconds.
The CD is then ejected and the previous
source before CD was selected returns.
Display information
When the CD player is working, the display shows the following information whichmeans:“T05”: shows the number of the track on
the CD;“03:42”: shows the time elapsed since
the start of the track (if the corresponding
Menu function is on);Select track(forward/backward)
Briefly press button ÷ to play the previous track and button ˜ to play the next
one. Tracks are played in sequence: after thelast track, the first one will be played andvice versa.
If playing the track started more than 3
seconds ago, pressing briefly button ÷
the track is played again from the start. In
this case if wanting to play the previous
track, press the button twice consecutively.
Fast forward/backward
Keep button ˜ pressed to move thetrack selected forward at high speed andkeep button ÷ pressed to move it quickly backward. Fast forward/backward is
stopped once the button is released.

Alfawiki.nl

160

Pause function
To pause the CD player, press button
MUTE. The display will show “PAUSE”.
To resume playing the track, press button
MUTE again.
The pause function is deactivated changing the sound source.

Entering the secret code

The radio is fitted with an antitheft protection system based on the exchange of information between the radio and the electronic control unit (Body Computer) installedon the car.

When turning the sound system on (in theevent of code request), the display will show
the word “CDC CODE” for about 2 seconds,
followed by four dashes “- - - -”.

This system warrants the highest level of
security and prevents entry of the secretcode every time the radio supply is disconnected.
If the result of the check is positive, the set
starts working, whereas if the comparison
codes are not the same or if the electronic
control unit (Body Computer) is replaced,the device informs the user of the need toenter the secret code according to the procedure described in the following paragraph.

The secret code comprises four figures from
1 to 6, each corresponding to one of thedashes.
To enter the first digit of the code, press
the corresponding key of the preset stations(from 1 to 6). Enter the other code digits inthe same way.
If the four figures are not entered within
20 seconds, the display shows the word
“CDC CODE” for 2 seconds and then fours
dashes “- - - -”. This is not to be considered
as an incorrect code entry.

Every time the user enters a wrong code,
the waiting time increases gradually (1 min,
2 min, 4 min, 8 min, 16 min, 30 min,1h,
2h, 4h, 8h, 16h, 24h) until reaching a maximum of 24 hours. The waiting time will
be shown on the display with the word “CDC
WAIT”. When this goes off it is possible tostart the new code entry procedure.
Code Card
This the document that certifies possessionof the radio. The Code Card contains the radio model, serial number and secret code.
IMPORTANT Keep the Code Card carefully to be able to give the related data to
the competent authorities in the event oftheft.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Antitheft protection

After entering the fourth digit (within 20
seconds), the radio starts working.
If a wrong code is entered, the radio
sounds a beep, the display shows the word
“CDC CODE” for 2 seconds and then fours
dashes “- - - -” to warn the user that it is necessary to enter the correct code.

Alfawiki.nl

161

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

MP3 CD PLAYER(where provided)

Technical data and operating conditions forMP3 files are as follows:– adopted CD-ROM shall be mastered according to ISO9660 Standard;

Introduction
This section only describes MP3 CD player operation variants: as concerns sound system operation, refer to “Functions and Adjustments” paragraph.
NOTE MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS andThomson multimedia.
MP3 mode
In addition to standard audio CDs, the soundsystem can also play audio files in MP3 format. Sound system will operate as describedin “Compact Disc player” paragraph when inserting a conventional audio CD.

– music files shall be renamed as “.mp3”
otherwise they cannot be played;– sampling frequencies are: 44.1 kHz,
stereo (96 to 320 kbit/s) - 22.05 kHz,mono or stereo (32 to 80 kbit/s);– it is possible to play variable bit-rate
tracks (files).
IMPORTANT Characters: blank, ‘ (apostrophe), ( and ) (open and closed brackets)
are not admitted in MP3 track names. Whensampling MP3 CD you must not use thesecharacters to name files otherwise the soundsystem will not be able to play it.

For optimal playing use only top quality
CDs mastered at a speed as low as possible.
MP3 CD files are structured by directories,
with sequential lists of all directories containing MP3 tracks (directories and sub-directories are all brought to the same level), directories not containing MP3 tracks
cannot be selected.

Alfawiki.nl

162

DISPLAY INFORMATION
ID3-tag info display(track informations)
In addition to time elapsed, directory nameand file name, also ID3-tag info relevant totrack Title, Artist, Author (see section “MP3disp function”) are displayed.
The MP3 directory name shown on the display corresponds to the name with which
the directory is stored on the CD, followedby an asterisk.
Example of full MP3 directory name: BESTOF *.
If you want to display one ID3-tag info (Title, Artist, Album) and the track being played
has no ID3-tag info then, the file name will
be displayed.

Press button ▲ to select the next directory or press button ▼ to select the previous
one. The name of the new selected directory will be shown on the display.
Directories are selected in cyclic sequence:
after the last directory the first one is selected and vice versa.
If no other directory/track is selected in
the following 2 seconds, the first track in the
new directory will be played.
If the last track in the currently selected directory is played, the next will then be
played.
Protection against theft
Refer to “Compact Disc player” paragraph.

CD CHANGER (CDC)
Installation and connection of a Lineaccessori CD
Changer shall only be performed by Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services.
Introduction
This section only describes CD Changer(where provided) operation variants: as concerns sound system operation, refer to“Functions and adjustments” paragraph.
Selecting the cd changer
Turn on the set, then press briefly and repeatedly button CD until selecting “CHANGER”.

Possible error messages
Error messages will be displayed in the following cases:– no CD in the CD Changer: the display
will show “CD ERROR” until changing thesound source;– selected CD is illegible (CD not in the selected position or CD not inserted properly):
the display shows “CD ERROR” after thenumber of the selected CD. The next CD will
be selected; if there are no other CDs or ifthey are also illegible the display will show
the wording “NO CD” until the sound sourceis changed;

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Select next/previous directory– error in CD reading: the display shows“CD ERROR”. The next CD will be selected;
if there are no other CDs in the CD Changer (after the last CD search will restart fromthe first one) or they are also illegible, if thesound source is not changed, the display willshow the following:❒ “CHANGER” for about 2.5 seconds;❒ “CD ERROR” for about 5 seconds;❒ plays next source for other 5 seconds;– a CD-ROM is inserted: next CD will beselected.

Alfawiki.nl

163

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Selecting the CD
Press button ▲ to select the next CD andbutton ▼ to select the previous CD.
If the loader does not contain a disc in theposition selected, the display briefly shows
the wording “CD ERROR”, and the next CD
is played automatically.

TROUBLESHOOTING

Compact disc player

Overview

CD not played
Loaded CD is dirty. Clean the CD.
Loaded CD is scratched. Try to play anotherCD.

Low volume
The Fader function shall only be set to “F”(front), to prevent sound system output
power reduction and volume muting if theFader level set is = R+9.
Required source cannot be
selected
No CD loaded. Load the CD or the MP3 CD
you want to play.

Required CD cannot be loaded
Another CD is already loaded. Press button
˚ and remove the CD.
MP3 file reading

Skipping when reading MP3 files
Loaded CD is scratched or dirty. Clean the
CD as described in “CD” voice in “Advise”
paragraph.
MP3 track length not displayedcorrectly
In certain cases (due to recording) MP3
track length can be displayed incorrectly.

Alfawiki.nl

164

DIESEL ENGINESPETROL ENGINES

If the outside temperature is very low, thediesel thickens due to the formation of paraffins and could clog the diesel fuel filter.

Use only unleaded petrol.
To prevent accidentally filling with leaded
petrol, the diameter of the fuel tank filler
is of such a size as not to accept the nozzle of this type of petrol.
The unleaded petrol octane number(R.O.N.) used shall not be less than 95.
IMPORTANT An inefficient catalyst
leads to harmful emission at the exhaust,thus environment pollution.
IMPORTANT Under no circumstances
should conventional leaded petrol be used,as this would irreparably damage the catalyst.

In order to avoid these problems, different
types of diesel are distributed according to
the season: summer type, winter type arctic type (mountains/cold areas).
If refuelling with diesel fuel not suitable forthe current temperature, mix diesel fuel with
TUTELA DIESEL ART additive in the proportions stated on the can, putting first theantifreeze in the tank and then the diesel
fuel.
TUTELA DIESEL ART shall be added todiesel fuel before the due to cold take place.
Adding it later will be worthless. If driving or
parking the vehicle for a long period in cold
areas/mountains, refuel with the diesel fuel available at local filling stations. In thissituation you are also recommended to havein the tank an amount of fuel 50% higher
than usable capacity.

Cars with diesel enginesmust only be filled withdiesel fuel for motor vehicles, in compliance with European
Specification EN590. The use ofother products or mixtures may irreparably damage the engine withinvalidation of the warranty due tothe damage caused. In the event ofaccidentally filling with anothertype of fuel, do not start the engine and empty the tank. If the engine has been run even for only avery short time, in addition to thetank, it is also necessary to drainout the whole fuel circuit.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

REFUELLINGREFUELLING
To guarantee full tank filling, carry out two
refuelling operations after the first click of
the fuel delivery gun. Avoid further topping
up operations that could cause damages tothe fuel system.

Alfawiki.nl

165

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

FUEL CAP
The fuel cap (C-fig. 154) is electricallycontrolled. To open it, press button (D-fig.
155); the flap can be opened only whenthe engine is off.
The fuel cap (A-fig. 154), accessible after opening the lid (C), is fitted with a catchto prevent losing it (B) which fastens it to
the lid.
When refuelling, hook the cap to the device on the inner flap, as illustrated.

IMPORTANT The sealing of the tank
may cause light pressurising in the tank. A
little breathing off, while slackening the cap,
is absolutely normal.

If required, replace the fuel cap only with a genuine
new one to prevent impairing the petrol vapour system.

After refuelling, turn the cap clockwise andclose the flap.
IMPORTANT For your safety, make surethat the fuelling pump nozzle is inserted correctly into the housing, before starting theengine.

Should it be not possible to open the fuelflap electrically, use the special cable in theboot (A-fig. 156) to open it manually.

Do not put naked flamesor lighted cigarettes near
the fuel filler hole as there
is a danger of fire. Do not bend too
close to the hole either so as not tobreathe in harmful vapours.

A0A0644b

A0A1108b

A0A0652b

Alfawiki.nl

166 fig. 154

fig. 155

fig. 156

The devices used to reduce diesel fuel engine emissions are:

The devices used to reduce petrol engine
emissions are:– exhaust gas recirculation system (E. G. R.);

– oxidising catalyst;– diesel particulate filter (DPF).

– trivalent catalytic converter (catalytic silencer);– Lambda sensors;– anti-evaporation system.
If one or more spark plugs are disconnected, do not run the engine, even for a
test.

During normal service thecatalyst and the diesel particulate filter (DPF) reachhigh temperatures. Do not therefore park the car over inflammablematerials (grass, dry leaves, pineneedles, etc.): fire hazard.

DPF (Diesel Particulate Filter)(for versions/ markets whereapplicable)
The Diesel Particulate Filter is a mechanical filter, integral with the exhaust system,that physically traps particulates present in
the exhaust gases of Diesel engines.
The diesel particular filter has been adopted to eliminate almost totally particulates incompliance with current / future law regulations.
During normal use of the car, the engine
control unit records a set of data (e.g.: travel time, type of route, temperatures, etc.)
and it will then calculate how much particulates has been trapped by the filter.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARENVIRONMENTAL
PROTECTION

Since this filter physically traps particulates,
it shall be cleaned (reclaimed) at regular intervals by burning carbon particles.

Alfawiki.nl

167

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Reclaiming procedure is controlled automatically by the engine control unit according to the filter conditions and the conditionsof use of the car. During reclaiming the following phenomena could take place: idlingslight increase, fan activation, slight smoke
increase, high exhaust temperatures.

Diesel Particulate Filter clogged
When the diesel particulate filter isclogged, the display shows symbol h+ message. In this event keep the engine
running until symbol h and message
turn off.

These situations shall not be considered as
faults and they do not affect car performance and environment.

Alfawiki.nl

168

STARTING
THE ENGINEIMPORTANT The car is fitted with anelectronic engine lock device. If the engine
fails to start, see the “Alfa Romeo CODE system”.

We recommend that during the initial period you do
not drive to full car performance (for example excessive acceleration, long journeys at top
speed, hard braking etc.).

The ignition switch is fitted with a safety
device which obliges the driver to return the
key to the STOP position before repeating the starting operation if the engine does
not start immediately.
Similarly, when the engine is running, thedevice prevents the key being moved from
the MAR to the AVV position.

When the engine isswitched off never leave
the ignition key in the MAR
position to prevent pointless current absorption from draining thebattery.

STARTING PROCEDURE
FOR PETROL VERSIONSIMPORTANT It is important never topress the accelerator before the engine has
started.
1) Make sure the handbrake is engaged.
2) Move the gear lever to neutral.

CORRECT USE OF THE CAR

CORRECT USE OF THE CAR

3) Fully depress the clutch pedal, so thatthe starter motor is not forced to crank thegears.
4) Ensure that the electric systems and devices, especially if they absorb high quantities of energy (e.g. heated rearscreen), areswitched off.
5) Turn the ignition key to the AVV position and release it as soon as the engine
starts.
6) If the engine does not start, return the
key to STOP, then repeat the procedure.

Running the engine in confined areas is extremely
dangerous. The engine consumes oxygen and produces carbon
monoxide which is a highly toxic
and lethal gas.

IMPORTANT If it is difficult to start theengine do not insist with extended attempts
which may damage the catalyst, but contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

Alfawiki.nl

169

CORRECT USE OF THE CAR

STARTING PROCEDURE
FOR JTD VERSIONS
1) Make sure the handbrake is engaged.
2) Set the gearshift lever to neutral.
3) Turn the ignition key to MAR. The reconfigurable multifunction display will show
the m warning light.
4) Wait for the m to turn off, whichtakes place sooner, the warmer the engine.
With the engine very warm the light mightstay on for such a short time as to pass unnoticed.

IMPORTANT The electric devices thatabsorb a high amount of energy (climate
control, rearscreen heating, etc.) are cut off
automatically during starting.
If the engine does not start at the first attempt, move the ignition key to STOP before repeating starting.
If starting is difficult (with the Alfa Romeo
CODE system working properly), do not insist with prolonged attempts.
Only use an auxiliary battery if the cause
is due to low battery charge. Never use abattery charger to start the engine.

5) Fully depress the clutch pedal.
6) Turn the ignition key to AVV as soon
as the m warning light has gone out.
Waiting too long, makes the warming workof the glow plugs useless.

Alfawiki.nl

170

WARMING THE ENGINE– Drive off slowly, at medium revs without accelerating abruptly.
– Do not drive at full performance for the
initial kilometres of the journey. Wait until
the engine coolant temperature reaches 5060 °C.

– Release the accelerator pedal and wait
until the engine reaches idle speed.
– Turn the ignition key to the STOP position and switch off the engine.
IMPORTANT After a tiring journey it isadvisable to let the engine “get its breathback” allowing it to idle a while to lower thetemperature in the engine compartment.

For cars with turbocharger in particular, but for allcars in general, sharp accelerating should be avoided before
switching the engine off.
A “kick” on the accelerator
serves no purpose, consumes fuelpointlessly and may cause serious
damage to the turbocharger impeller bearings.

EMERGENCY STARTING
If the Alfa Romeo CODE system does notrecognise the code transmitted by the ignition key (warning light Y on the instrument cluster glowing on steadily) emergency starting may be carried out using thecode of the CODE card.
For the correct procedure see the chapter“In an emergency”.
Never push, tow or coast
start the car. This could
cause fuel to flow into thecatalyst damaging it irreversibly.

IMPORTANT If the engine turns off withthe car on the move, the next time it is started, the Alfa Romeo CODE warning light may
turn on(Y). In this case, check that switching off and starting the engine again withthe car stationary, the warning light stays
off. If not, contact Alfa Romeo Authorised
Services.

CORRECT USE OF THE CAR

ENGINE SWITCHING OFF

Remember that the engine brake and power
steering are not operational until the engine is started,
therefore, much greater effort thanusual is needed on the brake pedal and steering wheel.

Alfawiki.nl

171

CORRECT USE OF THE CAR

PARKING
When the car is parked, proceed as follows:– Switch off the engine.
– Engage the handbrake.
– Engage first gear if the car is faced uphill or reverse if the car is facing downhill.
– Turn the front wheels so that the car will
immediately come to a halt if the handbrakeslips.

To avoid useless consumption of power andpossible draining of thebattery, never leave the ignition
key in the MAR position when theengine is not running.
Never leave children unattended in the car. Always remove the ignition
key when leaving the car and takeit with you.

REDUCINGRUNNING COSTSAND ENVIRONMENTPOLLUTION
By following a few simple guidelines, it
is possible to save car running costs and reduce harmful emissions.
GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
Car maintenanceTo take care of the car maintenance havethe checks and adjustments carried out inaccordance with the “Scheduled Maintenance Programme”.
Tyres
Check the pressure of the tyres routinely
at an interval of no more than 4 weeks: if
the pressure is too low consumption levels
increase as resistance to rolling is higher.
Useless loads
Never travel with an overload in the boot.
The weight of the car (especially in urban
traffic), and its geometry heavily affect consumption levels and stability.

Alfawiki.nl

172

Electric services
Use electric devices only for the amount oftime needed. Rearscreen heating, additional headlights, windscreen wipers and heater
fan need a considerable amount of energy,
therefore increasing the requirement of current increases fuel consumption (up to+25% in the urban cycle).
Climate control system
The climate control system is a further load
bearing heavily on the engine inducing higher consumption levels(up to +20% on average). Outside temperature permitting,preferably use the air vents.
Aerodynamic items
The use of non-certified aerodynamic items
may adversely affect air drag and consumption levels.

StartingDo not warm the engine with the car at astandstill or at idle or high speed: underthese conditions the engine warms up much
more slowly, increasing electrical consumption and emissions. It is therefore advisable
to move off immediately, slowly, avoiding
high speeds. This way the engine will warm
faster.
Pointless manoeuvres

CONDITIONS OF USE

Top speed
Fuel consumption considerably increases
with speed. Maintain an even as possible
speed, avoiding superfluous braking and accelerating, which cost in terms of both fueland emissions.
Acceleration
Accelerating heavily taking the engine toa high speed has a considerably adverse effect on consumption and emission levels;
it is wise to accelerate gradually and not exceed the maximum torque.

Cold starting
Short journeys and frequent cold starts do
not allow the engine to reach optimum operating temperature. This results in a significant increase in consumption levels (from+15 to +30% on the urban cycle) and emission of harmful substances.
Traffic situations and roadconditions

Avoid accelerating when waiting at traffic
lights or before switching off the engine. Thisand also double declutching is absolutely
pointless on modern cars and also increase
consumption and pollution.

Rather high consumption levels are tied tosituations with heavy traffic, for example
in queues with frequent use of the lower
gears or in cities with many traffic lights. Also winding mounting roads and rough roadsurfaces adversely affect consumption.

Gearshifting

Stopping in the traffic

As soon as the conditions of the traffic androad allow, use a higher gear.

During prolonged stops (e.g. level crossings) it is advisable to switch the engine off.

CORRECT USE OF THE CARDRIVING STYLE

Using a low gear to obtain brilliant performance increases consumption.
In the same way improper use of a highgear increases consumption, emissions andengine wear.

Alfawiki.nl

173

CORRECT USE OF THE CAR

TOWING TRAILERS
IMPORTANT NOTES

To make sure the maximum towableweight is not exceeded (given in the logbook) account should be taken of the fully
laden trailer, including accessories and personal belongings.

For towing caravans or trailers the car mustbe fitted with a certified tow hook and an
adequate electric system. Installation should
be carried out by specialised personnel who
release a special document for circulation on
the road.

Drive within the specific speed limit inevery country for car trailers. In any case themaximum speed should never exceed 100
km/h.

Install any specific and/or additional
rearview mirrors as specified by law. Remember that when towing a trailer, steep
hills are harder to climb, the braking spaces
increase and overtaking takes longer depending on the overall weight.

The ABS system withwhich the car may be fitted
does not control the trailer
braking system. Particular care is
therefore necessary on slippery
surfaces.

Engage a lower gear when driving downhill, rather than constantly using the brake.
The weight the trailer exerts on the car tow
hook reduces by the same amount the actual car loading capacity.

Under no circumstances
should the car brake system be altered to control
the trailer brake. The trailer braking system must be fully independent of the car’s hydraulic system.

Alfawiki.nl

174

INSTALLINGTHE TOW HOOK
The towing device should be fastened tothe body by specialised personnel according
to the following instructions and any additional and/or integrative information supplied by the Manufacturer of the device itself.
The towing device must meet current regulations with reference to Directive
94/20/CEE and subsequent amendments.
For any version the towing device usedmust match the towable weight of the caron which it is to be installed.
For the electric connection a unified connector should be used which is generally
placed on a special bracket normally fastened to the towing device itself.

Any electric brake should be supplied directlyby the battery through a cable with a crosssection of no less than 2.5 mm2. In addition
to the electrical branches, the car electric system can only be connected to the supply cable for an electric brake and to the cable for
an internal light, though not above 15W.

INSTALLATION LAYOUT(fig. 1)
The tow hook structure must be fastened in the points shown by the symbol Ø using 4 M8 screws and 7 M10screws.

After fitting, the fastening screw holes shall be
sealed to prevent exhaustgas inlet.

The inner plate (2) should have aminimum thickness of 6 mm.

IMPORTANT It is compulsory to fasten
a label (plainly visible) of suitable size andmaterial with the following wording:

The inner plate (3) should have aminimum thickness of 4 mm.

MAX LOAD ON BALL 60 kg.

CORRECT USE OF THE CAR

For the electrical connection a 7 or 13 pole
12VDC connection must be used (CUNA/UNI and ISO/DIN standards) following
any reference instructions given by the car
Manufacturer and/or towing device Manufacturer.

The inner plate (4) should have aminimum thickness of 5 mm.
The fastening points (1) should be fitted with 25 mm x 6 mm spacers.

Alfawiki.nl

175

CORRECT USE OF THE CAR

A0A0680b

Existing holes
Existing holes

SECTION A-A

2 M10 screws

3 M10 screws

4 M8 screws

2 M10 screws
Standard tow ball

Alfawiki.nl

176

fig. 1

Fully laden vehicle

Existing holes

It is necessary therefore to limit their use
to the purposes for which they are certified.

SNOW CHAINS

These tyres are specially designed for driving on snow and ice, to be fitted in replacement of those fitted on the car.

IMPORTANT When winter tyres areused with a maximum speed index below
the one that can be reached by the car (increased by 5%), place a notice in the passenger’s compartment, plainly in the driver’s
view, which states the maximum permissible speed of the winter tyres (as per EC Directive).

Use of snow chains should be in compliance with local regulations.

Use winter tyres of the same size as normal tyres provided on the car.
Alfa Romeo Authorised Services will bepleased to advise you on the choice of thetyre most suited to the use the Customer intends to make of it.
For the type of tyre to be used, inflationpressures and specifications of winter tyres,follow the instructions given in the “Technical Specifications” chapter.

Fit the same type of tyre on all four wheels(brand and profile) to ensure higher driving
safety when braking and good handling.
Remember that it is inappropriate tochange the direction of rotation of tyres.

The winter features of these tyres are reduced considerably when the tread depth
is below 4 mm. In this case, they should be
replaced.

For 1.8 T. SPARK, 2.0 JTS and 1.9
JTD versions, tyre 195/60 R15 can be
fitted with chains (use snow chains with reduced size with max protrusion beyond thetyre profile of 12 mm). Tyres 205/60 R15- 205/55 R16 - 205/55 ZR16 - 215/45
R17 - 215/45 ZR17 - 225/40 ZR18 cannot be fitted with snow chains.

CORRECT USE OF THE CAR

WINTER TYRES

For 3.2 V6 version, only use spider type
chains on tyres 215/45 R17” and215/45 ZR 17”. Tyres 225/45 ZR17 225/40 ZR18 cannot be fitted with snow
chains.
Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo provides SPIKESSPIDER COMPACT chains (model: 17003
compact) with 9 spikes, 16 mm adjustable
length and 17 inch wheel cap adapter.

Due to the winter features, under normal
conditions of use or long motorway journeys, the performance of these tyres is lower than that of normal tyres.

Snow chains should only be applied to thedrive wheels (front).
Before purchasing or using snow chains,
you are recommended to contact Alfa
Romeo Authorised Services.
Check the tensions of the chain after the
first few metres have been driven.

Alfawiki.nl

177

CORRECT USE OF THE CAR

Deactivate the ASR system when snow chains are
fitted. Press the ASR-OFF
button, button led turned on.
Snow chains cannot be
fitted to the space-saver
spare wheel. So, if a front(drive) wheel is punctured andchains are needed, a rear wheel
should be fitted to the front of thecar (adjust tyre pressure to thespecified value as soon as possible) and the space-saver spare
wheel should be fitted to the rear.
This way with two normal drive
wheels, snow chains can be fitted
to them to solve an emergency.

Keep your speed
down when snow
chains are fitted.
Do not exceed 50 km/h. Avoid
potholes, steps and pavements andavoid also to drive for long distances on roads not covered withsnow to prevent damaging the car
and the roadbed.

CAR INACTIVITY
If the car is to be left inactive for long periods, the following precautions should be
noted:– House the car under cover in a dry andpossibly ventilated place.
– Engage a gear.
– Check that the handbrake is not engaged.
– Clean and protect the paintwork by protective wax.
– Clean and protect the metal polishedparts with marketed products.
– Cover the rubber windscreen andrearscreen wiper blades with talcum powder
and raise them off the glass.
– Open the windows slightly.
– Inflate the tyres to a pressure of 0.5 bars
above normal. If possible rest the tyres onwooden planks and periodically check thepressure.
– Do not turn on the electronic alarm system.

Alfawiki.nl

178– Disconnect the battery negative terminal from the battery and check the battery
charge. This check should be repeatedevery three months during stowage.
Charge the battery if the indicator (where
provided) shows a dark colour in the central
green area.
– Do not empty the engine cooling system.
– Cover the car with a fabric or perforated plastic cover. Do not use compact plastic covers which prevent the humidity on thesurface of the car from evaporating.

In an emergency we recommend that you call the freephone number found in the Warranty Booklet.
You can also consult www.alfaromeo.com to find Alfa Romeo Authorised Services your nearest

EMERGENCY
STARTING

3) Fully depress the accelerator pedal andkeep it pressed. The U warning light will
come on for eight seconds and then go off,
now release the accelerator pedal.

If it is not possible to deactivate the engine
inhibitor with the Alfa Romeo CODE system,
the Y and U warning lights stay on andthe engine will not start. Emergency starting is needed to start the engine.

4) The U warning light begins to flash:after it has flashed the same number oftimes as the first digit on the CODE card,press the accelerator pedal and keep it
pressed until the U warning light turns on(for four seconds) and then goes off; now
release the accelerator pedal.

IMPORTANT You are advised to carefully read the entire procedure before carrying it out. If a mistake is made during the
emergency procedure, the ignition key should
be turned to STOP and the operations must
be repeated from the start (point 1).

5) The U warning light starts to flash: after the number of flashes corresponding to
the second digit on the CODE card, press theaccelerator pedal and keep it pressed.

1) Read the 5-figure electronic code on the
CODE card.

6) Repeat this procedure for the remaining digits on the CODE card.

2) Turn the ignition key to MAR.

7) After entering the last figure, keep theaccelerator pedal pressed. The U warning
light turns on (for four seconds) and thengoes off; now release the accelerator pedal.

8) A quick flash of the U warning light(for about four seconds) confirms that theoperation has been carried out correctly.

IN AN EMERGENCY

IN AN EMERGENCY

9) Start the engine turning the ignition key
from MAR to AVV without returning the
key to the STOP position.
Conversely, if the U warning light stays
on, turn the key to STOP and repeat theprocedure starting from point 1).
IMPORTANT After emergency starting
it is advisable to contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services, because the emergency
procedure must be repeated each time theengine is started.

Alfawiki.nl

179

IN AN EMERGENCY

STARTING
WITH AN AUXILIARY BATTERY
If the battery is flat (for battery with optical hydrometer: dark colour without green
area in the centre), it is possible to start theengine using an auxiliary battery with thesame capacity or a little higher than the flatone.
Proceed as follows (fig. 1):
1) Remove the protective cover on the positive battery post pressing on the opening
catches (front), then connect the positive
terminals (+ sign next to the terminal) of
the two batteries using a special cable.

IMPORTANT Do not directly connect thenegative terminals of the two batteries: any
sparks may ignite the detonating gas which
could come out of the battery. If the auxiliary battery is installed on another car, avoid
metal parts touching accidentally between
this car and the one with the flat battery.
3) Start the engine.
4) When the engine has started, remove
the cables, reversing the sequence followed
for connection.
If after a few attempts the engine does notstart, do not insist but contact the nearest
Alfa Romeo Authorised Service.

Never use a battery
charger to start the engine
as this could damage theelectronic systems of your car, particularly the ignition and fuel supply control units.

2) Connect the end of the second jumplead to the negative terminal (–) of the auxiliary battery with an earth point E on theengine or gearbox of the car to be started.

A0A0149b

Alfawiki.nl

180 fig. 1

This starting proceduremust be carried out by
qualified personnel because
incorrect operations may cause
electrical discharge of considerable
intensity. The liquid contained in
the battery is poisonous and corrosive. Avoid contact with the skinand the eyes. Keep naked flames
and lighted cigarettes away fromthe battery and do not cause
sparks.

IN THE EVENT OF A PUNCTURE

Never push, tow or coast
start the car. This could
cause fuel to flow into thecatalyst damaging it irreversibly.

If the car is equipped with “Kit for tyre repair Fix&Go“, see the instructions containedin the following chapter.
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONSAs an alternative to the FIX & GO, the carcan be provided (upon request) with spacesaver spare wheel or standard wheel; wheelchanging and correct use of the jack call forsome precautions as listed below.

Remember that the engine brake and power
steering are not operational until the engine is started,
therefore, much greater effort thanusual is needed on the brake pedal and steering wheel.

Signal the presence of thestationary car according tocurrent regulations: hazard
warning lights, reflecting triangle
etc.. Any passengers should leave
the car and wait for the wheel to bechanged out of harm of the traffic.
If parked on a slope or rough surface, chock the wheels withwedges or other suitable devices
to prevent the car from rolling.

Never start the engine
with the car jacked.
When driving with a trailer, disconnect the trailer before
raising the car. The compact spare
wheel is specific to your car, do notuse it on other models, or use thespare wheel of other models on
your car.
Should the type of wheels used
be changed (alloy rims instead ofsteel), it is also necessary tochange the whole set of fastening
bolts with others of suitable size.
The compact spare wheel is narrower than normal wheels, it
should be used only for the distance necessary to reach a service
point to have the punctured tyrerepaired and, during its use, the car
speed must not exceed 80 km/h.

IN AN EMERGENCY

STARTING BY INERTIA

Alfawiki.nl

181

IN AN EMERGENCY

The spare wheel has a
sticker that summarises
the main cautions for use
and limitations. The sticker should
never be removed or covered. The
sticker contains the following infour languages:
CAUTION! FOR TEMPORARY USE
ONLY! MAX 80 km/h! REPLACE BYNORMAL WHEEL AS SOON AS
POSSIBLE. DO NOT COVER THISLABEL IN USE.
Never fit a wheel cap on a compact spare wheel.
The car will handle differently
with the spare wheel fitted: avoid
heavy braking and accelerating,sharp corners and fast bends.

The life of the spare
wheel is approx. 3000 km,
after this distance it should
be replaced with another of thesame type.
Never attempt to fit a conventional tyre on a rim designed foruse as a compact spare wheel.
Have the punctured wheel repaired
and refitted as soon as possible.
Two or more compact spare
wheels should never be used together.
Do not grease the threads of bolts
before installing them; they mightslip out.
The jack only serves for changing wheels on the car with which itis provided or on cars of the samemodel. It must not be used for other purposes such as for instanceraising cars of other models. In nocase should it be used for repairs
under the car.
Incorrect positioning of the jackmay cause the jacked car to fall.
Do not use the jack for higher capacities than stated on its label.

Alfawiki.nl

182

Snow chains cannot be
fitted on the compact spare
wheel, so, if a front wheel
is punctured and chains need to be
used, the front axle should be fitted with normal wheels and thecompact spare wheel fitted to therear. This way, with two normal
wheels at the front, snow chains
can be fitted thereby solving the
emergency situation.
Never tamper with the inflation
valve.
Do not insert tools of any kind between the rim and the tyre.
Check, and if necessary, restore
the pressure of the tyres and of thecompact spare wheel to the values
given in the “Technical Specifications” chapter.

Please be informed that:– the jack mass is 2.100 kg.

– Stop the car in such a position that it is
not dangerous for the traffic, where it is possible to change the wheel safely. Where possible, park on a level, compact surface.
– Switch off the engine and engage thehandbrake.

– the jack requires no adjustment.
– the jack cannot be repaired. In the eventof breakage, it must be replaced by another original one.

– Use handle(A-fig.2) to remove thestiff covering (B).
– Loosen the clamping device (A-fig. 3).
– Take out the tool container (B) and takeit near the wheel to be changed.
– Take the spare wheel (C).

– Engage first gear or reverse.

– Remove the wheel cap (A-fig. 4) (only versions with steel rims)– no tools other than its operating crank
can be fitted to the jack.

IN AN EMERGENCY

CHANGING A WHEEL

A0A0151b

To change a wheel, proceed as follows:

A0A0645b

A0A0154b

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 2

fig. 3

fig. 4183

IN AN EMERGENCY– Using the wrench provided (A-fig. 5),loosen the fastening bolts by about one turn.
– Set the jack under the car, near thewheel to be changed taking care not to damage the plastic streamlined guard.
– Work the jack crank (A-fig. 6), to extend it until the groove (B) on the upper
part of jack is correctly inserted on the lower profile of the body (C) approx. 40 cm
from the profile of the wheelhouse.
– Work the jack and raise the car until thewheel is a few centimetres from the ground.

– Make sure that the contact surfaces ofthe spare wheel with the hub are clean andfree of impurities which may later cause thefastening bolts to slacken.
– Install the spare wheel matching thehole (A-fig. 7) with the corresponding pin(B).

REFITTINGA NORMAL WHEEL– Following the procedure described previously, raise the car and remove the spare
wheel.
For versions with steel rims:– Using the wrench provided, fasten thefive bolts.

– Fit the normal wheel matching the hole(A-fig. 7) with the corresponding pin (B).

– Lower the car and remove the jack.

– Make sure that the contact surfaces of
the wheel with the hub are clean and freeof impurities which may later cause the fastening bolts to slacken.

– Using the wrench provided, fully tighten
the bolts in the sequence shown in fig. 8.

– Completely unscrew the fastening bolts
and remove the wheel.

A0A0695b

A0A0694b

Alfawiki.nl

184 fig. 5

fig. 6

– Lower the car and remove the jack.
– Using the wrench provided, fully tighten the bolts in the sequence shown previously for the compact spare wheel fig. 8.
– Place the cap near the wheel so that the
inflation valve can come through the slot
provided on the cap.
– Press the circumference of the cap, starting from the parts nearest to the inflation
valve until it is inserted completely.
IMPORTANT Incorrect fitting may cause
the wheel cap to come off when the car istravelling.

For versions with alloy rims:

After refitting a wheel:– Tighten the pin (A-fig. 9) in one of
the fastening bolt holes on the wheel hub.

– stow the spare wheel in the space provided in the boot– Insert the wheel on the pin and, using
the wrench provided, tighten the four bolts
available. This is facilitated by the extension
provided (B).

– insert the jack in its container forcing it
lightly to prevent it from vibrating when travelling– Remove the pin (A-fig. 9) and tighten the last fastening bolt.
– Lower the car and remove the jack.
– Using the wrench provided, tighten thebolts in the sequence shown previously forthe compact spare wheel fig. 8.

A0A0155b– place the tools used in the housings in
the container

IN AN EMERGENCY– Using the wrench provided, tighten thefastening bolts.

– stow the container complete with toolson the spare wheel and secure everythingwith the clamping device (A-fig. 3)– correctly re-position the stiff cover.

A0A0156b

A0A0693b

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 7

fig. 8

fig. 9185

IN AN EMERGENCYQUICK TYREREPAIR KIT
FIX&GO automatic– bottle A-fig. 10 containing sealer andfitted with:

The car is equipped with a tyre quick repairing kit called “FIX&GO automatic”, replacing the tools and the compact spare
wheel usually provided with the car.

– sticker C with caution “max. 80km/h”, to be affixed in a visible position
for the driver (instrument panel) after repairing the tyre;

The kit fig. 10 is placed in the boot. In
the kit container you will also find the screwdriver and the tow ring.

– compressor D including gauge and connections;

The quick tyre repair kit includes:– filler hose B– instruction brochure fig. 11, to be used
for prompt and proper use of the quick repair kit and to be then handed to the personnel charged with handling the treatedtyre;– a pair of protection gloves located in theside space of the compressor;– adapters for inflating different elements.

A0A1095b

A0A1096b

Alfawiki.nl

186

fig. 10

fig. 11In the event of a puncturecaused by foreign bodies, it
is possible to repair tyres
showing damages on the track orshoulder up to max 4 mm diameter.

IT SHOULD BE NOTICED THAT:The sealing fluid of the quick tyre repair kit
is effective with external temperatures between –20°C and +50°C. The sealing fluid has limited life.

Holes and damages on
the tyre side walls cannot
be repaired. Do not use thequick tyre repair kit if damaging
is due to running with flat tyre.

The cylinder contains ethylene glycol. The cylinder
contains latex: it can cause
allergic reactions. It is harmful if ingested or inhaled and irritant for
the eyes and in case of contact. In
case of contact rinse immediately
with water and take off contaminated clothes. If swallowed, do not
induce vomit, rinse out the mouth,
drink a lot of water and call the
doctor immediately. Keep awayfrom children. This product mustnot be used by asthmatics. Do notinhale vapours. Call the doctor immediately in case of allergic reactions. Keep the cylinder in thespace provided for the purpose andfar from heat. The sealing fluid has
limited life.

IN AN EMERGENCY

Hand the instruction
brochure to the personnel
charged with treating thetyre repaired with the kit.

Repairs are not possible
in case of damages on thewheel rim (bad groove distortion causing air loss). Do not remove foreign bodies (screws ornails) from the tyre.

Alfawiki.nl

187

IN AN EMERGENCY

The compressor shall not
be operated for more than
20 minutes. Risk of overheating!. Tyres repaired with thequick tyre repair kit shall be used
temporarily only.

– loosen tyre inflation valve cap, take out
the filler hose A-fig. 14 and screw the ringnut B-fig. 15 on the tyre valve;

INFLATING PROCEDURE
Put on the protection
gloves provided together
with quick tyre repair kit.

A0A1098b

Proceed as follows:
Replace the cylinder if
sealer has run out. Do not
throw away the cylinder
and the sealing fluid. Have thesealing fluid and the cylinder disposed of in compliance with national and local regulations.

– place the wheel with the valve A-fig.
13 in the position shown in the figure then,pull up the handbrake, take the repair
kit and put it on the ground near the involved wheel;

fig. 14
A0A1097b

A0A1099b

Alfawiki.nl

188

fig. 13

fig. 15

– inflate the tyre to the correct pressure
value. Check tyre pressure on gauge B-fig.
16 with compressor off to obtain precise
reading;– if after 5 minutes it is still impossible
to reach at least 1.5 bar, disengage compressor from valve and current outlet, thenmove the car forth for approx. ten metres inorder to distribute the sealing fluid inside thetyre evenly, then repeat the inflation operation;– if after this operation it is still impossible after 5 minutes to reach at least 1.8 bar,
do not start driving since the tyre is excessively damaged and the quick tyre repair kit
cannot guarantee suitable sealing, contact
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services;– once the correct tyre pressure has beenreached, start driving immediately;

IN AN EMERGENCY– make sure the compressor switch Afig. 16 is set to 0 (off), start the engine
and fit plug A-fig. 17 into the cigar lighter
outlet and then turn on the compressor by
setting switch A-fig. 16 to I (on);Apply the sticker in a visible position for the driverto indicate that the tyrehas been treated with the quicktyre repair kit. Drive carefully especially when cornering. Do not exceed 80 km/h. Avoid heavy braking and accelerating.
A0A1100b

A0A0647b

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 16

fig. 17189

IN AN EMERGENCY– after driving for about 10 minutes stopand check again the tyre pressure; pull up
the handbrake;– drive with the utmost care to the nearest Alfa Romeo Authorized Service.

If the pressure falls below
1.8 bars, do not drive any
further: the quick tyre repair kit Fix & Go automatic cannot
guarantee proper hold because thetyre is too much damaged. Contact
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

It is of vital importance tocommunicate that the tyrehas been repaired using thequick tyre repair kit. Hand the instruction brochure to the personnel
charged with treating the tyre repaired with the kit.

FOR CHECKING ANDRESTORING PRESSURE ONLY
The compressor can be also used just for
restoring pressure. Disconnect the quick connection A-fig. 18 and connect it directly
to the tyre valve fig. 19; in this way thecylinder is not connected to compressor andthe sealing fluid will not flow into the tyre.

– if at least 1.8 bar pressure is read, restore proper pressure (with engine runningand handbrake on) and restart;

A0A1101b

A0A1102b

Alfawiki.nl

190

fig. 18

fig. 19

To replace the cylinder proceed as follows:– reconnect connection A or hose B into
the proper space.

– disconnect connection A-fig. 20 andhose B;– turn counter-clockwise the cylinder to replace and raise it;

It is of vital importance tocommunicate that the tyrehas been repaired using thequick tyre repair kit. Hand the instruction sticker to the personnel
charged with treating the tyre repaired with the kit.

IN AN EMERGENCY– fit the new cylinder and turn it clockwise;CYLINDER REPLACEMENTPROCEDURE

A0A01103b

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 20191

IN AN EMERGENCY

WHEN NEEDING TO
CHANGE A BULB

Alterations or repairs to
the electric system not carried out correctly and without taking into account the specifications of the system may cause
malfunctioning and the risk of fire.

Where possible the bulbs
should be replaced by Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services. The correct operation and positioning of the external lights arevital to the safety of the car andits passengers and the subject ofspecific laws.

Due to high voltage, thebulb of (Xenon) gas-discharge headlights must only be replaced by experts: dangerof death! Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

Alfawiki.nl

192

Halogen bulbs containpressurised gas which, if
broken, may cause small
fragments of glass to be projected outwards.

Halogen bulbs must be
handled touching only themetallic part. If the transparent bulb is touched with the fingers, its lighting intensity is reduced and life of the bulb may becompromised. If touched accidentally, rub the bulb with a clothmoistened with alcohol and allow
to dry.

TYPES OF BULBS (fig. 21)– When a light is not working, check thatthe corresponding fuse is intact beforechanging a bulb.

Various types of bulbs are fitted to your car:

– For the location of fuses, refer to theparagraph “In the event of a burnt fuse”
in this chapter.

A.
B.

– Always check headlight aiming after
changing a bulb to ensure they are safe.

To remove, free it from the clip on
its housing.
F.

Bayonet type bulbs

C.

Gas-discharge bulbs(Xenon)To remove the bulb, slacken the fastening ring nut and release the retaining ring.

Press the bulb, turn counter-clockwise
to remove this type of bulb from its
holder.

– Before changing a bulb check the contacts for oxidation.
– Burnt bulbs must be replaced by others of the same type and power.

All glass bulbs
These are pressed on. Pull to remove.

D.-E. Halogen bulbs

Tubular bulbs

IN AN EMERGENCY

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

A0A0503b

Free them from their contacts to remove.

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 21193

IN AN EMERGENCY

BULBS

FIGURE 21

TYPE

POWER

High beam

D

H7

55W

Low beam

D

H7

55W

Gas-discharge low beam headlights

F

DS2

35W

Front sidelights

B

H6W

6W

Foglights

E

H1

55W

Front direction indicators

B

PY21W

21W

Side direction indicators

A

W5W

5W

Rear direction indicators

B

P21W

21W

Rear sidelights - braking lights

B

P21/5W

5W/21W

Third stop (additional braking lights)

–

Led

–

Reversing light

B

P21W

21W

Rear foglights

B

P21W

21W

Number plate light

A

W5W

5W

Puddle lights

C

C5W

5W

Front roof light

C

C10W

10W

Rear roof light

C

C10W

10W

Courtesy mirror light

A

W1.2W

1.2W

Glovebox light

A

W5W

5W

C
Alfawiki.nl

C5W

5W

Boot light194

GAS-DISCHARGE (XENON)HEADLIGHTSHALOGEN HEADLIGHTS

The bulbs are arranged inside the light unit
as follows (fig. 22):

IMPORTANT For the type of bulb andpower rating, see previous section “Whenneeding to change a bulb”.
The front light units contain the sidelight,
dipped beam, main beam and fog lightbulbs.

Due to high voltage, thebulb of (Xenon) gas-discharge headlights must only be replaced by experts: dangerof death! Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

(A) Fog lights.
(B) Dipped beam headlights.
(C) Sidelights.
(D) Main beam headlights.
To change the bulbs of the sidelights, lowbeams and main beams it is necessary to
remove the cover (A-fig. 23) releasing
the catches (B).

IN AN EMERGENCY

IF AN EXTERIOR
LIGHT GOES OUT

To change the fog lights, remove the cover (C) turning counter-clockwise.

A0A0159b

A0A0160b

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 22

fig. 23195

IN AN EMERGENCY

After replacement, refit
the covers correctly checking that they are properly
secured.

Fog lights (fig. 24)
IMPORTANT When needing to change
the left bulb, the side trim next to the lightitself needs to be removed to facilitate access to the engine compartment.
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:– Remove the protective cover turning
counter-clockwise.
– Disconnect the electric connector (A).

IMPORTANT A slight layer of steam(fogging) can appear on the inside surfaceof the beam transparent cover: this is nota defect. The presence of condensate traces
in beams is a natural phenomenon, due toa low temperature and to the degree of humidity in the air. These traces will disappear
when the beams are turned on. Drops of water inside the headlight indicate instead water infiltration: contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

– Release the bulb catch (B).
– Remove the bulb and replace it.

A0A0161b

Alfawiki.nl

196

fig. 24– Fit a new bulb, making the tab of themetal part coincide with the one on the lamp
unit, then hook the bulb holder catch (B).
– Re-connect the electric connector (A).
– Refit the protective cover correctly.

Front side lights (fig. 26)

To change the bulb, proceed as follows:– Remove the protective cover releasing
the catches.

To change the bulb, proceed as follows:– Remove the protective cover releasing
the catches.
– Disconnect the electric connector (A).
– Release the bulb catch (B).

– Using the extension (A), integral withthe bulb holder (B), withdraw the bulb holder itself which is snap-fitted.

Main beam headlights(fig. 27)
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:– Remove the protective cover releasing
the catches.
– Disconnect the electric connector (A).
– Release the bulb catch (B).

– Remove the bulb and replace it.

– Remove the bulb (C), pushing gently
and turning counter-clockwise.

– Fit a new bulb, making the tabs of themetallic part coincide with the grooves on
the reflector, then hook the bulb holder catch(B).

– Change the bulb and re-insert the bulb
holder making sure that it clicks into place;also check that the bulb is in the correct position looking at the lamp from outside.

– Fit a new bulb, making the tabs of themetallic part coincide with the grooves on thereflector, then hook the bulb holder catch (B).

– Re-connect the electric connector (A).

– Refit the protective cover correctly.

– Refit the protective cover correctly.

IN AN EMERGENCY

Dipped beam headlights(fig. 25)

– Remove the bulb and replace it.

– Re-connect the electric connector (A).

– Refit the protective cover correctly.

A0A0162b

A0A0342b

A0A0164b

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 25

fig. 26

fig. 27

197

IN AN EMERGENCY– Replace the bulb;

FRONT DIRECTION
INDICATORS(fig. 28-29)
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:– Using the screwdriver provided, remove
the transparent unit operating on the two
metal clips as shown in the figure;– Refit the bulb holder turning counterclockwise and check that it is secured correctly;– Refit the transparent.

SIDE DIRECTION INDICATORS(fig. 30)
– Push the transparent cover towards therear of the car to compress the catch (A).
Release the front part and remove this unit.
– Turn the bulb holder (B) counter-clockwise and remove it from the cover.
– Remove the snap-fitted bulb and replace it.

– Turn the bulb holder clockwise (A) andremove it;– Insert the bulb holder (B) in the transparent cover, then position the unit making sure the catch clicks into place (A).

– Remove the bulb (B) pushing gently
and turning counter-clockwise;

A0A0625b

A0A0626b

A0A0166b

Alfawiki.nl

198 fig. 28

fig. 29

fig. 30

The reverse light and the rear fog light(both reverse lights for Mexico version) arehoused inside the light unit secured to therear bumper and are located at the bottomside.

– from the bumper lower side (fig. 31),
operate on the bulb holder (A-fig 32) turning it counter-clockwise and remove it. Takecare not to get burnt if the muffler is still hot;– Remove the bulb pushing gently andturning counter-clockwise;– Replace the bulb, then refit the bulb
holder.
Anyway, you are advised to have this operation carried out by Alfa Romeo Authorised
Services.

A0A0627b

REAR DIRECTION INDICATORSAND REAR SIDELIGHTSBRAKING LIGHTS (fig. 33-34)
The rear direction indicators and the sidelights-braking lights are in the tail light unit
fastened to the body.
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:– From inside the boot, open the compartment (A-fig. 33) and then the door(B) through the tab (C);IN AN EMERGENCY

To change the bulb, proceed as follows:

REVERSING LIGHT
AND REAR FOG GUARDS(fig. 31-32)– Turn the bulb for sidelight and braking
light counter-clockwise (D-fig.34), or thebulb for the direction indicator (E-fig.34)
and remove it;

A0A0628b

A0A0629b

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 31

fig. 32

fig. 33

199

IN AN EMERGENCY– Withdraw the light (F or G) push it gently and turn counter-clockwise;

NUMBER PLATE LIGHTS(fig. 35)

ADDITIONAL BRAKING LIGHT(THIRD STOP) (fig. 36-37)– Replace the bulb;

To change the bulbs, proceed as follows:

To change the led unit, proceed as follows:– Refit the bulb holder turning clockwise
and make sure it is secured correctly;– Work on the transparent cover frame,in the point shown by the arrow to compress
the catch (B). Free the opposite end and remove the unit.

– Open the tailgate and use a screwdriver to open the two covers (A-fig. 36);

– Refit the door (B) and close the compartment (A).

– Slacken the two fastening screws of (B)the led unit;– Turn the bulb holder counter-clockwise (A)and remove it from the transparent cover.
– Remove the snap-fitted bulb and replace it.
A0A0630b– Insert the bulb holder (A) in the transparent cover then refit the unit checking thatthe catch clicks into place (B).

A0A0631b

A0A0171b

Alfawiki.nl

200 fig. 34

fig. 35

fig. 36

PUDDLE LIGHTS (fig. 38)(per versions/market where
provided)– Refit the unit on the tailgate reversing
the above mentioned procedure.

To change the bulb, proceed as follows:– Open the door and slacken the screw(A) fastening the transparent covers.

FRONT ROOF LIGHT(fig. 39-40)– Remove the unit composed of the twotransparent covers then change the bulb, releasing it from the side contacts making surethat the new bulb is correctly clamped between the contacts.

To change the bulbs, proceed as follows:– Realign the two transparent covers andtighten the fastening screw (A).

A0A0632b

IN AN EMERGENCY

IF AN INTERIOR
LIGHT GOES OUT– disconnect the connector (C-fig. 37),
remove the led unit (D) and replace it witha new unit;– Remove the light unit (A) levering in
the points shown by the arrow (in correspondence with the retainer catches).
– Open the protective cover (B).
– Replace the bulb concerned releasing itfrom the side contacts making sure that the
new bulb is correctly clamped between thecontacts.

A0A0174b

A0A0175b

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 37

fig. 38

fig. 39201

IN AN EMERGENCY– Close the protective cover (B).
– Refit the light unit pressing gently in correspondence with the retainer catches, until hearing the click.

REAR ROOF LIGHT(fig. 41-42)
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:– Refit the light unit in the correct position
inserting first the side with the connector,
then pressing the other side until the catchclicks into place (B).

– Remove the light unit (A) levering in
the point shown by the arrow.
– Replace the bulb releasing it from theside contacts making sure that the new bulb
is correctly clamped between the contacts.

A0A0176b

A0A0177b

A0A0178b

Alfawiki.nl

202 fig. 40

fig. 41

fig. 42

– Put the bulb holder correctly (C) backin its housing.

To change the bulb, proceed as follows:– Refit the transparent cover (B) inserting it in its correct position firstly on one end
and then on the other until it clicks into
place.

– Open the mirror cover (A).
– Remove the transparent cover (B) levering in the point shown by the arrow.

GLOVEBOX LIGHT (fig. 45-46)
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:– Open the glovebox, then remove thelight unit (A) levering in the point shown by
the arrow.
– Open the protection (B) and change thesnap-fitted bulb.

– Gently raise the bulb holder (C) from its
housing, remove the snap-fitted bulb andchange it.

IN AN EMERGENCY

COURTESY MIRROR
LIGHT (fig. 43-44)– Close the protection (B) on the transparent cover.

A0A0179b

A0A0180b

A0A0181b

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 43

fig. 44

fig. 45

203

IN AN EMERGENCY– Refit the light unit inserting it in its correct position firstly on one end and then on
the other until it clicks into place.

BOOT LIGHT (fig. 47-48)
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:– Open the tailgate;– Remove the light unit (A-fig. 47) levering in the point shown by the arrow;

A0A0182b– Replace the bulb (B-fig. 48) releasing it from the side contacts, making surethat the new bulb is correctly clamped between the contacts;– Refit the light unit inserting it in its correct position firstly on one end and then on
the other until it clicks into place (C).

A0A0648b

A0A0649b

Alfawiki.nl

204 fig. 46

fig. 47

fig. 48

GENERAL(B) - Undamaged fuse

The fuse is a protective device for the electric system: it comes into action (i.e. it cutsoff) mainly due to a fault or improper action
on the system.

(C) - Fuse with damaged filament.

When a device does not work, check theefficiency of its fuse. The conductor element(A-fig. 49) must be intact; if not, replace the fuse with one of the same amp
rating (same colour).

If a general fuse (MAXIFUSE or MEGA-FUSE) cutsin, do not attempt any repair and contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

Remove the blown fuse using the pincer
provided (D), in the control box.

Never replace a fuse withmetal wires or anythingelse. Always use an intact
fuse of the same colour.

Before replacing a fuse,make sure the ignition key
has been removed and that
all the other services are switched
off and/or disengaged.

Never replace a fuse withanother with a higher amp
rating; DANGER OF FIRE.

If a fuse blows again,
contact an Alfa Romeo Authorised Service.

IN AN EMERGENCY

IN THE EVENT OF A BLOWN FUSE

A0A0185b

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 49

205

IN AN EMERGENCY

A0A0187b

To locate the protection fuses, consulting
the summary table on the following pages,
refer to the following illustrations fig. 52,
fig. 53 and 54.

Alfa GT fuses are located in three fuseboxes set on the dashboard, on battery positive terminal and near the battery.
To gain access to the fuses in the fuse box
on the dashboard, loosen the two retainers (A-fig. 50) and remove the protective
cover (B).
To gain access to the fuses in the fuseboxon the battery post, remove the protective
cover pressing the opening catches (front).

fig. 51
A0A0134b

Access is gained to the control box next tothe battery releasing the perimetral catches(A-fig. 51) and removing the protective
cover (B).

A0A0186b

Alfawiki.nl

206 fig. 50

fig. 52 - Fuse box on the dashboard

A0A0215b

IN AN EMERGENCY

A0A0137b

fig. 53 - Fuse box near the battery

fig. 54 - Fuse box on battery positive terminal

Alfawiki.nl

207

IN AN EMERGENCYFUSE SUMMARY TABLE
LIGHTSFIGUREFUSE

AMPERES

Hazard warning lights

52

F53

10

Right dipped-beam headlight

52

F12

10

Left dipped-beam headlight

52

F13

10

Right main-beam headlight

53

F14

10

Left main-beam headlight

53

F15

10

Foglights

53

F30

15

Braking light

52

F37

10

Reversing light

52

F35

7.5

+30 direction indicators

52

F53

10

FIGUREFUSE

AMPERES

Selespeed transmission pump

53

F03 (MAXI-FUSE)

30

Additional heater

54

F73 (MAXI-FUSE)

30

Headlight aiming device

52

F13

10

Climate control system

52

F31

7.5

Climate control system

52

F39

15

Climate control compressor

53

F19

7.5

F31

7.5

SERVICES

Heater unit relay coils

208

52
Alfawiki.nl

FIGUREFUSE

AMPERES

Key-operated +30

52

F32

15

Selespeed transmission

52

F32

15

Selespeed transmission

52

F51

7.5

Radio

52

F39

15

Navigator

52

F39

15

Rearscreen heating

52

F40

30

Windscreen - rearscreen washer (pump)

52

F43

30

Cigar lighter

52

F44

20

Seats with electric heating

52

F45

15

Heated wing mirrors – heated nozzles

52

F41

7.5

Cruise control

52

F35

7.5

Central door locking

52

F38

20

Headlight washer

53

F09

20

Services + 30

52

F39

15

Primary services (electronic injection)

53

F17

7.5

Secondary services (electronic injection)

53

F11

15

F49

7.5

Secondary services

Alfawiki.nl
52

IN AN EMERGENCYSERVICES209

IN AN EMERGENCYSERVICESFIGUREFUSE

AMPERES

Volumetric sensors

52

F39

15

ESP system sensor

52

F42

7.5

Steering angle sensor

52

F42

7.5

EOBD system diagnosis socket

52

F39

15

Cell phone provision

52

F39

15

Driver’s door control unit supply

52

F47

20

Passenger’s door control unit supply

52

F48

20

Control lighting

52

F49

7.5

Climate control system control lighting

52

F35

7.5

Instrument cluster

52

F37

10

Instrument cluster

52

F53

10

Driver’s door control unit

52

F39

15

ABS control unit

52

F42

7.5

ABS control unit

53

F04 (MAXI-FUSE)

50

Dashboard control unit

53

F02 (MAXI-FUSE)

50

Air - bag control unit

52

F50

7.5

Electronic injection control unit +30

53

F18

7.5

Engine compartment control box (petrol versions)

54

F70 (MEGA-FUSE)

125

Dashboard control unit

54

F71 (MAXI-FUSE)

70

52

F36

10

Trailer control unit

210

Alfawiki.nl

FIGUREFUSE

AMPERES

Climate control fan

53

F05 (MAXI-FUSE)

40

Radiator fan (first speed - petrol versions)

53

F06 (MAXI-FUSE)

30

Radiator fan (second speed - petrol versions)

53

F07 (MAXI-FUSE)

50

Horn

53

F10

15

Fuel pump

53

F21

15

Injectors (petrol versions)

53

F22

15

Ignition coils

53

F21

15

Tailgate electric unlocking

52

F60 (*)

25

Electronic injection system

53

F16

7.5

Bose system

52

F61 (*)

15

Bose system

52

F62 (*)

15

Additional heater

53

F08

30

Ignition switch

54

F72 (MAXI-FUSE)

30

Glow plug warming (JTD versions)

53

F01 (MAXI-FUSE)

50

Heated fuel oil filter (JTD versions)

53

F20

20

Engine compartment control box (JTD versions)

54

F70 (MEGA-FUSE)

150

Radiator fan (first speed – JTD versions)

53

F06 (MAXI-FUSE)

40

Radiator fan (second speed – JTD versions)

53

F07 (MAXI-FUSE)

60

Injectors (JTD versions)

53

F22

20

(*) Fuse behind dashboard control box on an auxiliary bracket.

IN AN EMERGENCYSERVICES

Alfawiki.nl

211

IN AN EMERGENCY

IN THE EVENT OF A FLAT BATTERY
Before anything else, you are advised toread the precautions for preventing the battery from draining and for ensuring long lifein the “car maintenance” chapter.
CHARGING THE BATTERYIMPORTANT The battery charging procedure is described only for information purposes. This operation should be carried out
by Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.
Charging should be slow at a low amp rating for 24 hours. Charging for a longer time
may damage the battery.

Charge the battery as follows:– Disconnect the battery negative terminal (–).
– Connect the charger cables to the battery terminal ensuring that the bias is correct.

The liquid contained in thebattery is poisonous andcorrosive. Avoid contact
with the skin or eyes. The battery
should be charged in a well ventilated place, away from naked
flames or possible sources ofsparks: danger of explosion andfire.

– Turn on the charger.
– After charging, turn off the charger before disconnecting it from the battery.
– Re-connect the battery negative terminal (–).

Do not attempt to chargea frozen battery: it mustfirstly be thawed, otherwise it may burst. If freezing has
occurred, the battery should bechecked by skilled personnel tomake sure that the internal elements are not damaged and thatthe body is not cracked, with therisk of leaking poisonous and corrosive acid.

Alfawiki.nl

212

The tow ring supplied with the car ishoused in the tool box under the boot mat.

– Firmly screw the ring in its housing.

To install the tow ring, proceed as follows:– Take the tow ring from the tool box.
– Remove the cover (A) snap-fitted on
the front (fig. 55) or rear (fig. 56)
bumper. To do this, using the flat-bladed
screwdriver provided, protect the tip with asoft cloth to avoid damaging the car.

Before tightening the ring
carefully clean the threaded housing. Before beginning to tow the car, make sure thatthe ring is firmly tightened in its
threaded housing.

A0A0650b

Before starting to tow,turn the ignition key to
MAR and back to STOP,
again without removing it. Removing the key automatically engages the steering lock resulting in
the impossibility to steer thewheels. When towing rememberthat without the help of the engine
brake and power steering greater
effort is required on the pedal andsteering wheel. Do not use flexible
cables for towing and avoid jerks.
During towing operations makesure that fastening the joint to the
car does not damage the components in contact with it. When towing the car, it is compulsory to follow specific traffic regulations concerning both the towing device andbehaviour on the road.

IN AN EMERGENCYIF THE CAR IS TO BE TOWED

A0A0670b

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 55 - front

fig. 56 - rear213

IN AN EMERGENCY

Do not start the engine
when towing the car.

IMPORTANT For versions with Selespeed transmission, make sure that thegears are in neutral (N) (checking that the
car moves if pushed) and then proceed as
for towing a normal car with mechanicaltransmission, following the instructions given previously.
Should it be impossible to set the gears toneutral, do not tow the car and contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

IF THE CAR IS TO BE LIFTED
The car may fall if the jackis not positioned correctly.
Never use the jack forhigher capacities than the one stated on the label.

USING AN ARM LIFT OR
WORKSHOP LIFT

These points are identified by symbol ▼on the bottom of the sidemember.

Take care when positioning the arms of the lift orworkshop lift to avoid damaging the side strips.

The car must only be lifted laterally positioning the ends of the arms or the workshop
lift in the areas illustrated, approx. 40 cm fromthe profile of the wheelhouse (fig. 57).
A0A0672b

Alfawiki.nl

214

fig. 57

– In motorways pileups, especially withpoor visibility, the risk of being involved inother crashes is high. Leave the car immediately and go beyond the guard-rail.

– It is important to keep calm.
– If you are not directly involved, stop at
least a few dozen metres away from the accident.

– If doors are blocked, do not try to get
out of the car breaking the windscreen whichis stratified. The windows and rear screen
are easier to break.

– On motorways, stop without blocking
the emergency lane.

– Remove the ignition key of the cars involved.

– Turn the engine off and the hazard warning lights on.

– If you note a smell of fuel or other chemical products, do not smoke and have a cigarette stubbed out.

– At night, illuminate the place of the accident with the headlights.
– Take care, do not risk being run over.
– Signal the accident placing the triangle
at regulation distance in a clearly visible
place.
– Call the emergency organisation, giving
the most accurate information possible. On
motorways use the special phones provided.

– To put out fires, even small ones, use
the extinguisher, blankets, sand, or earth.
Never use water.
– If use of the lighting system is not necessary, disconnect the battery negative terminal (–).

IF PEOPLE ARE INJURED– An injured person must never be abandoned. Helping is compulsory also for persons not directly involved in the accident.
– Do not crowd around injured people.
– Reassure the injured person that help
is on the way, and stay near to overcome
any panic.

IN AN EMERGENCY

IN THE EVENT
OF AN ACCIDENT– Release or cut the seat belt restraining
injured persons.
– Do not give injured persons anything
to drink.
– An injured person should never be
moved except in the following circumstances.
– Remove an injured person from the car
only in danger of fire, sinking or falling.
When removing an injured person: do notpull the limbs or bend the head and keep
the body as horizontal as possible.
FIRST AID KIT
In addition to the first-aid kit, it is also
wise to keep an extinguisher and a blanket in the car.

Alfawiki.nl

215

CAR MAINTENANCECAR MAINTENANCESCHEDULEDSERVICING
Correct maintenance is determined in ensuring long car life under the best conditions.
This is why Alfa Romeo has programmed
a series of checks and maintenance operations every 20,000 km.
IMPORTANT On versions fitted with reconfigurable multifunction display, at 2000
km from the maintenance deadline, the display will show “REFER TO SERVICE MANUAL” which is shown again turning the ignition key to MAR, every 200 km. For further details, see “Service” in the “Reconfigurable multifunction display”.

It is however wise to remember that Programmed Maintenance does not completely cover all the car’s requirements: also in
the initial period before the 20,000 km service coupon and later, between one coupon
and another, ordinary care is still necessary
such as for example routinely checking andtopping up the level of fluids, checking thetyre pressure, etc...
IMPORTANT The Programmed Maintenance coupons are specified by the Manufacturer. The failure to have them carried out
may invalidate the warranty.
The Programmed Maintenance service iscarried out by all Alfa Romeo Authorised Services, at pre-established times.

Alfawiki.nl216

If during each operation, in addition to theones programmed, the need arises for further replacements or repairs, these may be
carried out only with the explicit agreementof the customer.
IMPORTANT You are advised to contact
Alfa Romeo Authorised Services in the eventof any minor operating faults, without waiting for the next service coupon.

Thousands of km

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

180

Check tyre conditions/wear and adjust pressure if necessary

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Check operation of lighting system (headlights, direction indicators,
hazard warning lights, boot, passenger compartment, glovebox lights, warning lights, etc..)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Check operation of windscreen washer system, adjust spray jets

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Check position/wear of windscreen/rearscreen wiper blades

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Check operation of front disk brake pad wear indicator

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Check wear conditions of rear disk brake pads

●

●

●

Sight check the conditions of: body exterior, underbody protection, stiff pipes
and hoses (exhaust - fuel supply - brakes), rubber parts(boots - sleeves - bushes etc..)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Check cleanness of locks, bonnet and boot and lever cleanness, and lubrication

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Sight inspect accessory drive belt conditions

CAR MAINTENANCESCHEDULED MAINTENANCE PROGRAMME●

Check handbrake lever stroke adjustment

●

●

●

●

Change air cleaner cartridge (petrol versions)

●

●

●

●

Change air cleaner cartridge (JTD versions)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Top up fluid levels (engine coolant, brakes, windscreen washer, battery, etc..)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Alfawiki.nl

217

CAR MAINTENANCE

Thousands of km
Check and if necessary top up the Selespeed automatic transmission oil level(2.0 JTS versions)

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

180

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Sight check for conditions of timing gear drive toothed belt (3.2 V6 and JTD versions)●

Check emissions/smoke at the exhaust (JTD versions)

●

●

●

●

Check operation of engine control system (through diagnosis socket)

●

●

●

●

●

Check mechanical transmission oil level●●

Change counter-rotating shaft drive belt●

Change timing gear drive belt (1.8 T.SPARK and 2.0 JTS versions) (*)●

Change timing gear drive belt (3.2 V6 and JTD versions) (*)●

Change accessory poly-V drive belt●●

Change spark plugs (petrol versions)
Change engine oil and oil filter (petrol versions) (or every 24 months)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Change engine oil and oil filter (diesel with DPF versions)(**)(or every 24 months)
Change engine oil and oil filter (diesel without DPF versions)(**)(or every 24 months)●

Change brake fluid (or every 24 months)

218

●

●

Change fuel filter (JTD versions)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Change pollen filter (or every year)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

(*) Regardless of the km covered, the timing belt shall be replaced every 4 years for particularly demanding use (cold climates, driving in the city, idling for a long time) or in any case every 5 years.
(**) Engine oil and oil filter shall actually be changed according to the conditions of use of the car and it is indicated by the relevant warning light or message (where provided) on the instrument panel(see “Warning lights and messages” paragraph).
Alfawiki.nl
If the car is used mainly on urban routes or if the yearly kilometres travelled are less than 10,000 km, the engine oil and filter must be changed every 12 months.

For cars with an annual mileageof below 20,000 km (for example
about 10,000 km) the following
yearly inspection programme is advised:– Sight check for conditions of: engine,
gearbox, transmission, pipes (exhaust - fuel supply - brakes), rubber parts (boots sleeves - bushes etc..), brake and fuel supply system hoses– Check battery charge

ADDITIONALOPERATIONSEvery 1000 km or before long journeys,
check and if necessary top up:– Sight check for conditions of various drive belts– engine coolant fluid level– Check tyre conditions/wear and if necessary adjust the pressure (including spare
wheel)– Check and if necessary top up fluid levels (engine coolant, brakes, windscreen
washer, battery etc. )– power steering fluid level– Check operation of lighting system(headlights, direction indicators, hazard
warning lights, boot, passenger compartment, glovebox lights, warning lights, etc.)– Change engine oil and oil filter– Change pollen filter.

– Check operation of windscreen wiper
system, spray jet adjustment– brake/hydraulic clutch control fluid level

CAR MAINTENANCE

ANNUAL INSPECTION
PROGRAMME– windscreen washer and headlamp washer fluid level– tyre pressure and conditions.
Every 3000 km check and if necessary
top up the engine oil level.
The use of FL Selenia products is recommended which have been designed andmade expressly for Alfa Romeo cars (see“Refuelling” in the “Technical Specifications” chapter).

– Check windscreen blade position/wear– Check front disk brake pad conditions
and wear– Check cleanness of bonnet and bootlocks, and lever cleanness and lubrication.

Alfawiki.nl

219

CAR MAINTENANCE

IMPORTANTEngine oil

IMPORTANT
Diesel filter

IMPORTANTAir cleaner

Should prevailing use of the car be under
one of the following specially heavy conditions:

The variety of the degree of purity of thefuel oil in commerce may make it necessary
to change the fuel oil filter more frequently
than stated in the Scheduled Maintenance
Programme. If the engine is “sobbing” itis a sign that the filter needs changing.

Using the car on dusty roads change theair cleaner more frequently than specified in
the Schedule Maintenance Programme.

– trailer or caravan towing– dusty roads– short distances (less than 7-8 km) repeated and with external temperatures below zero
– frequently idling engines or long distancelow speed driving or in case of a long term
inactivity
replace engine oil more frequently than required on the Scheduled Maintenance Programme.

Alfawiki.nl

220

For any doubts concerning the intervals between the engine oil and air cleaner replacement in relation to how the car is used,
contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

IMPORTANT
Pollen filter

It is advisable to check the battery charge,
preferably at the onset of winter, to preventthe possibility of the electrolyte freezing.

If the car is used frequently in dusty or
heavily polluted environments it is advisable
to replace the filtering element more frequently; in particular it should be replaced if
a reduction of the amount of air admitted tothe passenger compartment is noted.

This check should be carried out more frequently if the car is used mainly for shorttrips, or if it is fitted with accessories thatpermanently absorb electricity even with theignition key removed, especially in the caseof after market accessories.

Car maintenance should be
entrusted to Alfa Romeo
Authorised Services. For
routine and minor maintenance operations you wish to carry out
yourself, always make sure you
have the proper equipment, genuine
Alfa Romeo spares and the necessary fluids; do not however carryout these operations if you have noexperience.

CAR MAINTENANCE

IMPORTANT
Battery

If the car is used in hot climates or particularly harsh conditions it is wise to check thelevel of the battery fluid (electrolyte) more
frequently than specified in the Scheduled
Maintenance Programme.

Alfawiki.nl

221

CAR MAINTENANCE

A0A0736b

CHECKING LEVELS
Never smoke while working in the engine compartment; gas and inflammablevapours may be present, with therisk of fire.

When topping up takecare not to confuse the various types of fluids: they
are incompatible with one another and could seriously damage thecar.

fig. 1 - 1.8 T. SPARK version
A0A0681b

1 Engine oil - 2 Battery - 3 Brake fluid 4 Windscreen/rear window/headlightwasher fluid - 5 Engine coolant - 6 Powersteering fluid - 7 Selespeed transmission oil(2.0 JTS Selespeed versions)

Alfawiki.nl

222

fig. 2 - 2.0 JTS version

CAR MAINTENANCE

A0A0683b

1 Engine oil - 2 Battery - 3 Brake fluid 4 Windscreen/rear window/headlightwasher fluid - 5 Engine coolant - 6 Powersteering fluid
fig. 3 - 3.2 V6 version
A0A0396b

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 4 - JTD 16V version

1 Engine oil - 2 Battery - 3 Brake fluid 4 Windscreen/rearscreen/headlamp washer fluid - 5 Engine coolant fluid - 6 Powersteering fluid

223

CAR MAINTENANCE

ENGINE OIL (fig. 5-6-7-8)
The engine oil should be checked with the
car on a level surface a few minutes (about5) after the engine has been switched off.
Remove the dipstick (A), clean it, put itback in completely, remove it and check thatthe level is within the MIN and MAX
marks on the dipstick. The interval between
the MIN and MAX marks correspond toabout one litre of oil.

When the engine is hot,take care when working
inside the engine compartment to avoid burns. Rememberthat when the engine is hot, thefan may cut in: danger of injury.

A0A0682b

If the oil level is near or even below theMIN mark, add oil through the filter neck(B), until reaching the MAX mark.
IMPORTANT If a routine check reveals
that the level is above the MAX mark, contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services to havethe correct level restored.
IMPORTANT After topping up the oil,
before checking the level again, run the engine a few seconds and wait for a few minutes after stopping it.

Never add oil with characteristics (classification,
viscosity) which are different from those of the oil already inthe circuit.

fig. 6 - 2.0 JTS version
A0A0737b

A0A0406b

A

A0A0398b

B

Alfawiki.nl

224 fig. 5 - 1.8 T. SPARK version

fig. 7 - 3.2 V6 version

fig. 8 - JTD 16V version

Max engine oil consumption is usually 400
grams every 1000 km.
During the initial period of use the engine
settles, therefore engine oil consumption
may be considered stabilised only after the
first 5000 ÷ 6000 km.
IMPORTANT Engine oil consumption depends on the way of driving and the conditions of use of the car.

SELESPEED TRANSMISSION
OIL (fig. 9)
The Selespeed transmission oil should bechecked with the car on a level surface andwith the engine stopped and cold.
To check the level, proceed as follows:– turn the ignition key to MAR;– disconnect the breather tube and remove the cap (A) checking that the level
corresponds with the MAX mark on the dipstick integrated with the cap;
– if the oil is below the MAX mark, top
up to reach the correct level;

Used engine oil and filter
contain harmful substances
for the environment. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services to have the oil and the filter
changed, as they are equipped todispose of the waste oil and filters
respecting nature and the law.

– after refitting the cap, insert thebreather tube firmly on the housing on thecap and turn the ignition key to STOP.

Do not add oil with specifications other than that
already in the gearbox.

CAR MAINTENANCE

Engine oil consumption

Used gearbox oil contains
dangerous substances forthe environment. For changing the oil we advise contacting Alfa Romeo Authorised Services whoare equipped for disposing of used
oil respecting nature and the law.

A0A0197b

Be very careful working
inside the engine compartment if the engine is hot:danger of burns. Remember thatthe fan may cut in if the engine isvery hot: danger of injury.

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 9225

CAR MAINTENANCE

ENGINE COOLANT FLUID(fig. 10)

Do not remove the cap
when the engine is hot:danger of burns.

The level of the coolant in the header tank(reservoir) should be checked with the engine cold and the car on a level surface andit should be between the MIN and MAX
marks on the tank.

A0A0240b

If the level is low, loosen the header tankcap (A) and slowly pour a mixture of 50%
distilled water and 50% PARAFLU UP FL
Selenia through the filler neck until nearing the MAX mark.
The antifreeze mixture of 50% PARAFLU
UP and 50% distilled water guarantees protection down to –35 °C.

The cooling system uses
PARAFLU UP antifreeze.
Do not add fluid having different specifications from that already existing. PARAFLU UP cannot be mixed with other types of
fluids. Should other fluids be
added, do not start the engine andcontact Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services as soon as possible.

Alfawiki.nl

226 fig. 10

The cooling system ispressurised. If necessary,
replace the cap only withanother genuine one, otherwise
system efficiency could be compromised. Do not remove the reservoir
cap when the engine is hot: yourisk scalding yourself.

Check that the level of the oil in the reservoir is at maximum.
This operation should be carried out withthe car on a level surface and the engine
switched off and cold.
Check that the level reaches the MAX
mark on the reservoir or coincides with theupper notch (maximum level) on the dipstick (A) integral with the reservoir cap.

If the oil level in the reservoir is below thespecified one, top up only with one of the
products listed in the “Fluids and lubricants”
table in the “Technical specifications” chapter proceeding as follows:– Start the engine and wait for the oil level in the reservoir to stabilise.
– With the engine running, turn the steering wheel lock to lock a few times.
– Top up to the MAX level notch, thenrefit the cap.

BRAKE AND HYDRAULIC
CLUTCH FLUID (fig. 12)
Check that the fluid level in the reservoir
is at maximum. Top up with the brake fluid
specified in the table “Fluids and lubricants”(see section “Technical specifications").
NOTE Clean accurately the tank cap A
and the surrounding surface. When opening
the cap take the utmost care to prevent impurities entering the tank. When topping up,
always use a funnel with built-in filter withmesh equal to or lower than 0.12 mm.

CAR MAINTENANCE

POWER STEERING FLUID(fig. 11)IMPORTANT For this operation it ishowever recommended to contact Alfa
Romeo Authorised Services.
Do not allow the power
steering fluid to touch hotparts of the engine: it is inflammable.
A0A0400b

Oil consumption is very
low; if topping up again isneeded shortly afterwards,
have the system checked for possible leaks by Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

A0A0217b

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 11

fig. 12227

CAR MAINTENANCE

Make sure that the highly corrosive brake fluid
does not drip onto thepaintwork. If it does, wash it off
immediately with water.

IMPORTANT Brake and hydraulic clutch
fluid is hygroscopic (i.e. it absorbs moisture).
For this reason, if the car is mainly used inareas with a high degree of atmospheric humidity, the fluid should be replaced at more
frequent intervals than specified in the
Scheduled Maintenance Programme.

Brake and clutch fluid ispoisonous and highly corrosive. In the event of accidental contact, wash the parts
concerned immediately with neutral soap and water, then rinse
thoroughly. See a doctor at once if
the fluid is swallowed.

WINDSCREEN/REARSCREEN
HEADLIGHT WASHER FLUID(fig. 13)
Open the cap (A) and check the level inthe reservoir.
If necessary top up using a mixture of water and TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC
35 fluid as follows:– 30% of TUTELA PROFESSIONAL
SC 35 and 70% water in summer;

The π symbol on the container indicates synthetic
brake fluid, distinguishingit from the mineral kind. Using mineral fluids irreversibly damages the
special braking system rubber
seals.

– in the case of temperatures below–20°C use TUTELA PROFESSIONAL
SC 35 fluid neat.
Some commercial additives for windscreen washers are inflammable. The
engine compartment contains hot
components which may set it on
fire.

Do not travel with thewindscreen washer reservoir empty: the action of
the windscreen washer is fundamental for improving vision.

A0A0242b

To avoid damaging thepump motor, do not use thewindscreen/rearscreen
washers when the reservoir isempty.

Alfawiki.nl

228– 50% of TUTELA PROFESSIONAL
SC 35 and 50% water in winter;fig. 13

The air cleaner is connected to the temperature and air flow sensors which send
to the control unit the electric signals needed for correct operation of the injection andignition system.
It must therefore always be in perfect conditions, to ensure correct operation of theengine, low consumption and exhaust emission levels.

If the car is habituallyused in dusty areas, thecleaner should be replaced
at shorter intervals than thosespecified in the Programmed Maintenance Schedule.

Any attempt to clean thecleaner may damage it,leading to serious engine
damage.

If the operations concerning cleaner replacement described below are not carried out correctly and with the due
precautions, they may compromise
the travelling safety of the car. You
are recommended to have this operation carried out by Alfa Romeo
Authorised Services.

DIESEL FUEL FILTER(diesel versions)

DRAINING CONDENSATIONWATER

The presence of water inthe supply circuit may
cause serious damage tothe entire injection system andcause irregular running of the engine. If the warning message +symbol are shown on the reconfigurable multifunction display contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services as soon as possible to havethe system relieved. If warning indications turn on after refuelling,water has probably been poured
into the tank: turn the engine off
immediately and contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services.

CAR MAINTENANCE

AIR CLEANER

Alfawiki.nl

229

CAR MAINTENANCEPOLLEN FILTERBATTERY

Have the dust/pollen filter checked oncea year by Alfa Romeo Authorised Services,preferably at the onset of summer.

The battery is of the “Limited maintenance” type: under normal conditions of use
the electrolyte does not need topping up
with distilled water.

If the car is mainly used in dusty or heavily polluted areas, the filter should bechanged at more frequent intervals thanspecified in the Scheduled Maintenance Programme.
IMPORTANT The failure to replace thepollen filter can considerably reduce the effectiveness of the climate control system.

Contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services tohave the battery checked/replaced.

Incorrect fitting of electrical accessories can seriously damage the car. If after
buying the car, you wish to installelectric accessories (alarm, soundsystem, radiotelephone, etc.) contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services who will be able to suggest
the most suitable devices andabove all advise about the need touse a more powerful battery.

Batteries contain substances that are very harmful for the environment. You
are advised to have the batterychanged at Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services, which are properly
equipped for disposing of used batteries respecting nature and the law.
If the car is to remain stationary for a long time invery cold weather, remove
the battery and take it to a warm
place, otherwise it might freeze.

When doing any work on
the battery or near it, always wear special protective goggles.

A0A0224b

The liquid in the battery ispoisonous and corrosive.
Avoid contact with eyesand skin. Do not bring naked
flames or possible sources ofsparks near to the battery: risk offire and explosion.

Alfawiki.nl

230 fig. 14

CHECKING THE CHARGE
The battery charge may be checked
through the indicator A (where required)
set on the battery cover and acting according to the colour the indicator shows.
Should the battery be not fitted with battery charge inspection device (optical electrolyte indicator), inspection operations shallbe carried out by skilled personnel only.
Refer to the table below or to the label(fig. 15) on the battery itself.

CHARGING THE BATTERYIMPORTANT The battery charging procedure is described only for information purposes. This operation should be carried out
by Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

– After charging, turn off the charger before disconnecting it from the battery.
– Re-connect the battery negative terminal (–).

Charging should be slow at a low amp rating for 24 hours. Charging for a longer time
may damage the battery.
Charge the battery as follows:– Disconnect the battery negative terminal (–).
– Connect the charger cables to the battery terminal ensuring that the bias is correct.
– Turn on the charger.

CAR MAINTENANCE

Working with a low fluid
level may damage the battery irreversibly, evencausing it to burst.

Never attempt to chargea frozen battery: it mustfirstly be thawed, otherwise it may burst. If freezing has
occurred, the battery should bechecked before charging by specialised personnel, to make surethat the internal elements are notdamaged and that the body is notcracked, with the risk of leaking
poisonous and corrosive acid.

A0A0393b

Brilliantwhite colour

fig. 15

Top up the electrolyte

Contact Alfa Romeo
Authorised Services

Dark colour
without green
area in the centre

Low charge level

Charge the battery(you are advised to contact
Alfa Romeo Authorised Services)

Dark colour with green
Alfawiki.nl
area in the centre

Sufficient electrolyte
level and charge

No action

231

CAR MAINTENANCE

IMPORTANT If the battery is kept witha charge of below 50% it is damaged by sulphation, its starting capability is reduced and
it is also more subject to the possibility offreezing (this may occur already at -10 °C).
In the event of a prolonged inactivity, referto the paragraph “car inactivity”, in thechapter “Correct use of the car”.
CHANGING
THE BATTERY
When changing the battery it should be replaced with another original one with thesame characteristics. If it is replaced by abattery with different characteristics, themaintenance intervals given in the Scheduled Maintenance Programme in this chapter are no longer valid and for maintenanceit will be necessary to follow the battery
Manufacturer’s instructions.
IMPORTANT Lacking power to control
units (e.g. battery change/disconnection
and replacement of power window control
unit protection fuses), window automatismmust be reset.

Proceed as follows with doors closed:
1. open completely the driver’s window
keeping the button pressed for atleast 3 seconds after full opening;
2. close completely the driver’s window
keeping the button pressed for atleast 3 seconds after full closing;
3. proceed as described in points 1 and2 also for the passenger’s side;
4. check for proper initialisation by operating the windows in automatic.
USEFUL HINTS TO EXTEND
THE LIFE OF YOUR BATTERY
To avoid rapidly draining the battery andensure that it continues to work correctly,
the following should be noted:– The terminals must always be firmly
tightened.
– As far as possible, avoid keeping services on for a long time with the engine
stopped (radio, hazard lights, parking lights,etc.).

Alfawiki.nl

232– When leaving the car parked in agarage, make sure that the doors, bonnet,
boot and interior lids are properly shut toprevent lights from staying on.
– Before carrying out any work on theelectric system, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
– If after buying the car, you wish to install electric accessories which require a permanent electric supply (alarm, voice feature,radionavigator with satellite antitheft function etc.) or accessories that burden the electric system, contact Alfa Romeo Authorised
Services whose qualified personnel, in addition to suggesting the most suitable devices belonging to Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo,
will evaluate the overall electric absorption,
checking whether the car’s electric system
is capable of withstanding the load required,or whether it should be integrated with amore powerful battery. In fact, as some ofthese devices continue absorbing energy
even when the ignition key is off (car stationary, engine off), they gradually drain thebattery.

BatteryMaximum permissible
loadless absorption

60 Ah

36 mA

70 Ah

42 mA

WHEELS AND TYRES

Incorrect pressure causes abnormal tyre
wear:(A): normal pressure: tread evenly worn.

TYRE PRESSURE
Check the tyre pressure of every wheel, including the spare, every two weeks and before a long journey. The pressure should bechecked with the tyre rested and cold.
It is normal for the pressure to increase
when the car is in use; for the correct tyre
inflation pressure, see “Wheels” in the“Technical Specifications” chapter.

You are also reminded that services withhigh current absorption switched on by theuser, such as for example: baby bottle warmers, vacuum cleaner, mobile phone, mini
fridge, etc., quicken the battery draining process if they are turned on with theengine off or running at idle speed.

(B): low pressure: tread particularly wornat the edges.
(C): high pressure: tread particularly wornin the centre.

CAR MAINTENANCE

The maximum absorption of all the accessories (standard and fitted afterwards)
should be 0,6 mA x Ah (of the battery), as
shown in the following table:

Tyres should be changed when the tread
thickness is reduced to 1.6 mm.
In any case follow local regulations.

A0A0225b

IMPORTANT When installing additional systems on the car, bear in mind that improper branches on connections of the carwiring are dangerous, particularly if safety
devices are involved.

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 16233

CAR MAINTENANCE

IMPORTANT NOTES– Where possible, avoid sudden braking,tyre squealing starts, violent bumps against
kerbs, potholes or obstacles of various kinds.
Prolonged driving on rough roads may damage the tyres;– Routinely check the tyres for cuts on thesides, swellings or uneven tread wear. If necessary contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services;– Avoid overloading the car when travelling: this may cause serious damage to thewheels and tyres;– If a tyre is punctured, stop immediately and change it to avoid damage to the tyreitself, the rim, suspensions and steering system;– Tyres age even if they are not used
much. Cracks in the tread rubber are a signof aging. In any case, if the tyres have beenon the car for over 6 years, they should bechecked by specialised personnel, to see ifthey can still be used. Also remember tocheck the compact spare wheel;– In case of replacement, always fit newtyres, avoiding those of dubious origin;

Remember that car roadholding also depends oncorrect tyre inflation pressure.

Excessive low pressurecauses overheating of thetyre with the possibility ofserious damage to it.

Do not cross switch thetyres, moving them fromthe right of the car to theleft and vice versa.

Alloy rim painting involving temperatures exceeding 150 °C should be
avoided since wheel mechanicalcharacteristics could be impaired.

Alfawiki.nl

234

RUBBER HOSES
As far as the brake system and fuel supply rubber hoses are concerned, carefully follow the Scheduled Maintenance Programme. Indeed, ozone, high temperatures
and the prolonged lack of fluid in the system may cause hardening and cracking of
the hoses, with possible leaks. Careful control is therefore necessary.

BLADES
Periodically clean the rubber part using special products; TUTELA PROFESSIONAL
SC 35 is recommended.
If the rubber blades are bent or worn theyshould be replaced. In any case they should
be changed once a year.

SPRAY NOZZLES (fig. 18)

Changing the windscreen
wiper blade (fig. 17)

If the jet of fluid is inadequate, firstly checkthat there is fluid in the reservoir: see“Checking levels” in this chapter.

How to remove the blade
Proceed as follows:– raise the windscreen wiper arm (A);Then check that the nozzle holes are notclogged, if necessary use a needle.

– turn the blade (B) 90° around the pin(C) set at wiper arm end;

If necessary, direct the jet of fluid working on the adjustment screw.

– remove the blade from pin (C).

A few simple notions can reduce the possibility of damage to the blades:

How to refit the blade– If the temperature falls below zero makesure that ice has not frozen the rubber
against the glass. If necessary, thaw using
an antifreeze product.

– fit pin (C) into the hole set in the middle of the blade (B);– Remove any snow from the glass: in addition to protecting the blades, this prevents
effort on the motor and overheating.

CAR MAINTENANCE

WINDSCREEN/REARSCREEN WIPERS

Proceed as follows:– refit the wiper arm with the blade on
the windscreen.

A0A0728b– Do not operate the windscreen andrearscreen wipers on dry glass.

A0A0696b

Driving with worn wiper
blades is a serious hazard,
because visibility is reduced in bad weather.

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 17

fig. 18235

CAR MAINTENANCE

HEADLIGHT WASHERSBODYWORK(fig. 19)
Regularly check that the spray jets are intact and clean.

PROTECTION FROMATMOSPHERIC AGENTS

If it is necessary to direct the jet, contact
an Alfa Romeo Authorized Service.

The main causes of corrosion are:– atmospheric pollution– salty air and humidity (coastal areas, or
hot humid climates)– seasonal environment conditions.
Not to be underestimated is also the abrasive action of wind-borne atmospheric dust
and sand and mud and gravel raised by other cars.
On your car, Alfa Romeo has implemented the best manufacturing technologies toeffectively protect the bodywork against corrosion.

A0A0704b

Alfawiki.nl

236 fig. 19

These include:– Painting products and systems whichgive the car particular resistance to corrosion
and abrasion.
– Use of galvanised (or pretreated) steel
sheets, with high resistance to corrosion.
– Spraying of the underbody, engine compartment, wheel arches and other parts withhighly protective wax products.
– Spraying of plastic parts, with a protective function, in the more exposed points:
underdoor, inner wheel arch linings, etc.
– Use of “open” boxed sections to prevent condensation and pockets of moisturefrom triggering rust inside.
CAR EXTERIOR AND
UNDERBODY WARRANTYYour car is covered by warranty against
perforation due to rust of any original element of the structure or body. For the general terms of this warranty, refer to Alfa
Romeo Warranty booklet.

Paint
The paintwork does not only serve an
aestethic purpose but also protects the underlying sheet metal.
In the case of deep scrapes or scores, youare advised to have the necessary touching up carried out immediately to avoid theformation of rust.
Only original products should be used fortouching up paint (see “Body paint identification plate” in the “Technical Specifications” chapter).
Normal paint maintenance consists inwashing at intervals depending on the conditions and environment of use. For example, in highly polluted areas, or if the roads
are sprayed with salt, it is wise to wash the
car more frequently.

To correctly wash the car:1) Remove the aerial from the roof to prevent damage to it if the car is washed in
an automatic system.
2) Spray the car with a low pressure jet ofwater.
3) Pass a sponge moistened with a lightdetergent solution, rinsing the sponge frequently.

Where possible, do not park under trees;
the resinous substances many species release give the paint a dull appearance andincrease the possibility of triggering the rustprocesses.
IMPORTANT Bird droppings must be
washed off immediately and thoroughly as
the acid they contain is particularly aggressive.

CAR MAINTENANCE

ADVICE FOR PRESERVINGTHE BODYWORK4) Rinse well with water and dry with ajet of air or chamois leather.
When drying, take particular care with theless visible parts like door surrounds, bonnet and around the headlights where water may stagnate. The car should not be taken to a closed area immediately, but left in
the open so that residual water can evaporate.

Detergents cause waterpollution. Therefore the car
should be washed in areas
equipped for collecting and purifying the liquid used in the washingprocess.

Do not wash the car after it has been left
in the sun or with the bonnet hot: this mayalter the shine of the paintwork.
Exterior plastic parts must be cleaned in
the same way as the rest of the car.

Alfawiki.nl

237

CAR MAINTENANCE

Windows

Engine compartment

INTERIOR FITTINGS

Use specific products to clean the windows.
Use clean cloths to avoid scratching or altering the transparency of the glass.

At the end of the winter the engine compartment should be carefully washed, without directing the jet against electronic control units. Contact a specialised workshop tohave this done.

Periodically check that water is not trapped
under the mats (due to water dripping off
shoes, umbrellas, etc.) which could cause
oxidisation on the sheet metal.

Detergents cause waterpollution. Therefore the engine compartment should
be washed in areas equipped forcollecting and purifying the liquid
used in the washing process.

Never use inflammableproducts like fuel oil ether
or rectified petrol for cleaning inside the car. The electrostatic charges generated when rubbing
to clean may cause fire.

IMPORTANT The inside of therearscreen should be wiped gently with acloth in the direction of the filaments toavoid damaging the heating device.
Front headlights
IMPORTANT Do not use aromatic substances (e.g. petroleum) or ketones (e.g.
acetone) to clean the front headlight plastic transparents.

IMPORTANT The car should be washedwith the engine cold and the ignition key at
STOP. After washing make sure that thevarious protections (e.g. rubber caps andvarious covers) have not been damaged or
removed.

CLEANING SEATS AND FABRIC
AND VELVET PARTS– Use a soft brush or a vacuum cleaner toremove dust. Velvet is cleaned better if thebrush is moistened.
– Rub the seat with a sponge moistenedwith a solution of water and neutral detergent.

Alfawiki.nl

238

INTERIOR PLASTIC PARTS– Remove dried on dirt with a lightly
moistened chamois leather or cloth without pressing too hard.

For routine cleaning of interior plastic parts
use a soft cloth moistened with water andneutral soap. Remove grease or persisting
stains using appropriate solvent-free products designed to preserve appearance andcolour of plastic components.

– Remove liquid and grease stains witha dry absorbent cloth without rubbing. Then
wipe with a soft cloth or chamois leather
with water and neutral soap. If the stain persists, use specific products, carefully following the instructions for use.

IMPORTANT Never use spirit or petroleum to clean the glass of the instrument
panel or other plastic components.

IMPORTANT Never use spirit or alcoholbased products, even in small percentage.

Fabric upholstery of yourcar is purpose-made towithstand common wear
resulting from normal use of thecar. It is however absolutely necessary to prevent hard and/or prolonged scratching/scraping causedby clothing accessories like metallic buckles, studs, “Velcro” fixings,
etc. that stressing locally the fabriccould break yarns and damage theupholstery as a consequence.

Do not keep aerosol cansin the car. There is the risk
they might explode. Aerosolcans must never be exposed to atemperature above 50°C. The temperature inside the car might go wellbeyond that figure when exposedto the sun’s rays.

STEERING WHEEL/GEAR LEVER
KNOB WITH GENUINE LEATHER
COVERING
These components shall only be cleaned
with water and neutral soap. Never use spirit or alcohol-based products.
Before using special products for cleaninginteriors, read carefully label instructions andindications to make sure they are free fromspirit and/or alcohol-based substances. If
when cleaning the windscreen with special
glass products, some drops fall on theleather covering of the steering wheel/gear
lever knob remove them immediately andthen clean with water and neutral soap.

CAR MAINTENANCE

CLEANING LEATHER SEATSIMPORTANT Take the utmost carewhen engaging the steering lock to prevent
scratching the leather covering.

Alfawiki.nl

239

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONST E C H N I C A L S P E C I F I C AT I O N SIDENTIFICATION DATA
You are advised to note the identification
codes. The identification datastamped andgiven on the labels and their position are
the following (fig. 1):
1 - Identification label
2 - Body label
3 - Bodywork paint identification label
4 - Engine label.

IDENTIFICATION LABELThis (fig. 2) is to be found on the front
crossmember of the engine compartment.
It contains the following information:(A) Space for details of national homologation(B) Space for punching the consecutive
chassis number(C) Space available for maximum
weights authorised by various national regulations(D) Space for version and any supplementary indications to those specified

A0A0654b(E) Space for smoke coefficient (JTD versions)(F) Space for punching manufacturer’s
name.
BODYWORK LABELThis is located in the engine bay, to one
side of the upper right shock absorber (fig.
3) and contains:– Type of vehicle: ZAR 937.000– Manufacturer’s serial number (chassis
number).

A0A0246b

A0A0247b

Alfawiki.nl

240 fig. 1

fig. 2

fig. 3

The label (fig. 4) is on the inner left edgeof the tailgate. It contains the following information:

Engine code

Body versions

1.8 T SPARK

AR32205

937CXR1A 26

2.0 JTS

937A1000

937CXH1A 22

D. Indication on the type of product to be
used for touching-up.

2.0 JTS(for special markets)

932A2000

937CXT1A 29

ENGINE STAMP

2.0 JTS Selespeed

937A1000

937CXH11 23

Theengine marking is stamped on the
gearbox side of the crankcase, in correspondence with the exhaust manifold.

3.2 V6

936A000

937CXP1B 25

JTD 16V

937A5000

937CXN1B 24D

A. Paint manufacturer.
B. Name of colour.
C. Colour code.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSENGINE CODES - BODY VERSIONSBODYWORK PAINT
IDENTIFICATION LABEL

A0A0651b

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 4

241

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSENGINE

Code type
Cycle

1.8 T. SPARK

2.0 JTS
2.0 JTS
Selespeed

2.0 JTS (**)

3.2 V6JTD 16V

AR32205

937A1000

932A2000

936A000

937A5000

Otto

Otto

Otto

Otto

Diesel4 in line

4 in line

4 in line

6 in 60° V

4 in line

Piston bore and stroke

mm

82.7

83 x 91

83 x 91

93 x 78

82 x 90.4

Total displacement

cm3

1747

1970

1970

3179

1910

11.5 : 1

11.5 : 1

11.5 : 1

10 : 117.5 : 1

kW
HP
rpm

103
140
6500

121
165
6400

119
163
6400

176,5
240
6200

110
150
4000

Nm
kgm
rpm

163
16.6
3900

206
21
3250

201
20
3250

300
30.6
4800

305
31
2000

NGK PFR6B+NGK PMR7ANGK BKR6EKPA+NGK PMR7ANGK PFR6BNGK BKR6EKPANGK PFR6BNGK BKR6EKPANGK PFR6B

Unleaded
petrol95 RON

Unleaded
petrol95 RON

Unleaded
petrol95 RON

Unleaded
petrol95 RON

Number and position of cylinders

Compression ratio
Maximum horsepower (EEC):at
Maximum torque (EEC):
at
Spark plugs (*)Fuel(*) There are two different spark plugs for each cylinder, one per type(**) For versions/markets where applicable

To change plugs contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

Alfawiki.nl

242

Diesel fuel for motor
vehicles(Specification EN 590)

Supply

1.8 T. SPARK

2.0 JTS

3.2 V6JTD 16V

Multipoint electronic injection

Direct electronic injection

Direct electronic injection

Common Rail direct injection
with supercharging

Alterations or repairs to the fuel supply system carried out incorrectly and without taking account of
the technical features of the system, may cause operating faults with the risk of fire.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSFUEL SUPPLYTRANSMISSION
1.8 T. SPARK

2.0 JTS

2.0 JTS Selespeed

3.2 V6JTD 16V

GearboxFive forward gears plus
reverse withsynchronisers forforward speeds

Five forward gears plus
reverse withsynchronisers for forward
speedsFive forward gears andreverse with electronic
control system

Six forward gears plus
reverse all synchronised

Six forward gears plus
reverseall synchronised

ClutchDry single disk withhydraulic control

Dry single disk withhydraulic control

Dry single disk withelectrohydraulic control

Dry single disk withhydraulic control

Dry single disk withhydraulic control

Drive

Front

Front

Front

Front

Front

Alfawiki.nl

243

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSFRONT WHEEL DRIVE WITH
SELF-LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL(upon request for versions/markets where applicable)
Alfa Q2 characteristics are such as toguarantee top performance with whateverroad condition.

Alfa Q2 features front wheel drive withfront mechanical self-locking differential LSD(Limited Slip Differential). Torque level between right and left wheel is modulated according to the TORSEN B front differential grip. Mechanical modulation is continuous and gradual thus optimizing drive underwhatever running condition and guaranteeing smooth drive, high stability and keeping
top comfort conditions.

Alfawiki.nl

244This type of differential enables to exploit
the tyre-road grip at the best even underpoor grip conditions: the driver is however
charged with observing common safety rules
since road safety is always the driver's responsibility.

1.8 T. SPARK - 2.0 JTS - 3.2 V6 - JTD 16V
Service brakes:– front

Disk– rearDisk

Parking brakeControlled by hand lever, acting on the rear brakes

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSBRAKESSUSPENSION
1.8 T. SPARK - 2.0 JTS - 3.2 V6 - JTD 16V
Front

quadrilateral system with stabiliser bar

Rear

Mc Pherson type

STEERING SYSTEM
1.8 T. SPARK - 2.0 JTS - 3.2 V6 - JTD 16V
Typerack and pinion with hydraulic power steering

Turning radius(between pavements) m

11.5

Alfawiki.nl

245

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSWHEELS

CORRECT TYRE READING(fig. 5)

COMPACT SPARE WHEEL
Pressed steel rim.

RIMS AND TYRESWHEEL GEOMETRY

Pressed steel or alloy rims.

Front wheel toe-in measured from rim torim: –1 ±0.6

Radial tubeless tyres.
The log book shows all the homologatedtyres.

The values refer to the vehicle travelling.

The code may be in one of the ways given in the example.
Example:IMPORTANT In the event of any discrepancies between this Handbook and thevehicle Log Book, only the latter should beconsidered.

205/55 R 16 91 W
or
205/55 ZR 16

While the specified dimensions remain thesame, for driving safety, the vehicle must be
fitted with tyres of the same brand and typeon all wheels.

205 = Nominal width (S, distance inmm between sides).

IMPORTANT Do not use inner tubes
with Tubeless tyres.
A0A0465b

Alfawiki.nl

246

Below, please find the instructions needed to understand the meaning of the code
stamped on the tyre.

fig. 555= Percentage height/width (H/S)
ratio.

R= Radial tyre.

ZR= Radial tyre, with speed over 240
km/h.

16

= Rim diameter in inches (Ø).

91

= Load index (capacity), e.g. 91 =615 kg. Not present in ZR tyres.

W, Z = Maximum speed index. In ZR
tyres the speed index Z is before
the R.

Maximum speed index

CORRECT RIM READING

60 = 250 kg
61 = 257 kg
62 = 265 kg
63 = 272 kg
64 = 280 kg
65 = 290 kg
66 = 300 kg
67 = 307 kg
68 = 315 kg
69 = 325 kg
70 = 335 kg
71 = 345 kg
72 = 355 kg
73 = 365 kg
74 = 375 kg
75 = 387 kg
76 = 400 kg
77 = 412 kg
78 = 425 kg
79 = 437 kg
80 = 450 kg
81 = 462 kg
82 = 475 kg
83 = 487 kg
84 = 500 kg

Q = up to 160 km/h.

Below, please find the instructions needed
to understand the meaning of the code
stamped on the rim, as shown in (fig. 5).

85 = 515 kg
86 = 530 kg
87 = 545 kg
88 = 560 kg
89 = 580 kg
90 = 600 kg
91 = 615 kg
92 = 630 kg
93 = 650 kg
94 = 670 kg
95 = 690 kg
96 = 710 kg
97 = 730 kg
98 = 750 kg
99 = 775 kg
100 = 800 kg
101 = 825 kg
102 = 850 kg
103 = 875 kg
104 = 900 kg
105 = 925 kg
106 = 950 kgR= up to 170 km/h

S

= up to 180 km/h.

T= up to 190 km/h.

U = up to 200 km/h.

Example:H = up to 210 km/h.

6,5 J x 15 H2 ET 43

V = over 210 km/h.
ZR = over 240 km/h.
W = up to 270 km/h.
Y= up to 300 km/h.

Maximum speed index
for snow tyres
Q M + S = up to 160 km/h.
T M + S = up to 190 km/h.
H M + S = up to 210 km/h.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Load index (capacity)

6,5 = rim width in inches (1)J= rim drop centre outline (side projection where the tyre beadrests) (2)15 = rim nominal diameter in inches(corresponds to diameter of thetyre to be mounted) (3 = Ø)
H2 = “hump” shape and number (relief
on the circumference holding theTubeless tyre bead on the rim).
ET 43 = camber angle (distance between
disk/rim line and wheel rim centre line)

Alfawiki.nl

247

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

248

1.8 T SPARK

2.0 JTSJTD 16V

3.2 V6“Black Line”
and “Q2”
versions“Collezione”
versions

6 1/2 J x 15
7 J x 16
7 J x 17 ()7 1/2 J x 17 ()7 J x 16
7 J x 17 ()7 1/2 J x 17 ()6 1/2 J x 15
7 J x 16
7 J x 17 ()7 1/2 J x 17 ()7 1/2 J x 17

8J X 18

7J X 17205/60 R15 91V (•)
205/55 R16 91V (•)
205/55 ZR16 (•)
215/45 R17 87W ()205/55 R16 91W (•)
205/55 ZR16 (•)
215/45 R17 87W ()205/60 R15 91V (•)
205/55 R16 91W (•)
205/55 ZR16 (•)
215/45 R17 87W ()4J x 15

4J x 15

4J x 15– Tyre125/80 R15

125/80 R15

Fittings
on requestRims

6 /2 J x 15

Standard
fittings
Rims
Tyres

Compact spare
wheel
– Rim

225/45 ZR17 91Y
225/40ZR 18 92Y (•) 215/45 R 17 87W (•)(Pirelli Pzero Rosso) (•)(Michelin Pilot Sport2) (*)(*) 225/45 ZR17
225/40 ZR 18 92Y (•)(Bridgestone S-02) (•) (*) (Pirelli P Zero Rosso) (*)

4J x 15

4J x 15

125/80 R15

125/80 R15

125/80 R15

6 /2 J x 15

6 /2 J x 15

6 /2 J x 15

6 1/2 J x 15

7 J x 178 J x 18

7 J x 178 J x 18

7 J x 178 J x 18

7 J x 16
7 J x 17

7 J x 16
8 J x 18

Tyres

195/60 R15 88V (**)
215/45 R17 87W (•)
215/45 ZR17 87W(Pirelli P7000) (•) (*)
215/45 ZR17 87Y(Good Year Eagle F1) (•)(*) 225/40 ZR18 92Y(Michelin Pilot Sport 2)
225/40 ZR 18 92Y (•)(Pirelli P Zero Rosso) (*)(•) (*) 205/60 R15 91V(Michelin Pilot
Primacy) (•) (*)

195/60 R15 88V (**)
215/45 R17 87W (•)
215/45 ZR17 87W(Pirelli P7000) (•) (*)
215/45 ZR17 87Y(Good Year Eagle F1) (•)(*)
225/40 ZR18 92Y(Michelin Pilot
Sport 2) (•) (*)
225/40 ZR 18 92Y (•)(Pirelli P Zero Rosso) (*)

195/60 R15 88V (**)
215/45 R17 87W (•)
215/45 ZR17 87W(Pirelli P7000) (•) (*)
215/45 ZR17 87Y(Good Year Eagle F1)(•) (*) 225/40 ZR18 92Y(Michelin Pilot Sport 2)
225/40 ZR 18 92Y (•)(Pirelli P Zero Rosso) (*)(•) (*) 205/60 R15 91V(Michelin Pilot
Primacy) (•) (*)

Wintertyres

195/60 R15 88Q (M+S)
205/55 R16 91T (M+S)
215/45 R17 87H (M+S)

195/60 R15 88Q (M+S)
205/55 R16 91T (M+S)
215/45 R17 87H (M+S)

195/60 R15 88Q (M+S)
205/55 R16 91T (M+S)
215/45 R17 87H (M+S)

(•)
(**)
(***)

1

1

(***)

1

Alfawiki.nl

1

7 1/2 J x 17
8 J x 18

215/45 R17 87W (**) 195/60 R15 88V (**) 195/60 R15 88V (**)
205/55 R16 91V (•) 205/55 R16 91V (•)
215/45 R17 87W(Pirelli P7000) (*) (**)
215/45 R17 87W (•) 225/40 R18 92Y (•)
215/45 ZR17 87Y(Michelin Pilot Sport2) (*)(Good Year Eagle F1) (*)
225/40 ZR18 92Y (•)(**)225/40 ZR18 92Y(Pirelli P Zero Rosso) (*)(Michelin Pilot
Sport 2) (•) (*)
225/40 ZR 18 92Y (•)(Pirelli P Zero Rosso) (*)

215/45 R17 87H (M+S)
225/45 ZR17 91H (M+S)

195/60 R15 88Q (M+S)
205/55 R16 91T (M+S)
215/45 R17 87H (M+S)

Unchainable tyres() For versions/markets where applicable(*) Size certified and admitted only for the specified tyres
IMPORTANT Tyres that can be fitted with chains; see paragraph “Snow chains” in section “Correct use of the car”
The compact spare wheel cannot be used on this version

195/60 R15 88Q (M+S)
205/55 R16 91T (M+S)
215/45 R17 87H (M+S)

reduced load

Tyres

full load

front

rear

front

rear

195/60 R15

bar

2.2

2.2

2.5

2.5

205/60 R15

bar

2.3

2.3

2.6

2.6

205/55 R16

bar

2.3

2.3

2.6

2.6

205/55 ZR16

bar

2.3

2.3

2.6

2.6

215/45 R17

bar

2.4

2.3

2.7

2.6

225/45 ZR17

bar

2.5

2.4

2.8

2.7

225/40 ZR18

bar

2.5

2.4

2.8

2.7

Compact spare wheel
125/80 R15

bar

4.2

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSCOLD TYRE INFLATION PRESSURE

4.2

With the tyre hot the inflating pressure should be +0.3 bar compared with the specified ratingWith winter tyres the inflation pressure should be +0,2 bar compared with the specified rating

PERFORMANCE

Maximum speed in km/h

1.8 T. SPARK

2.0 JTS
Selespeed

2.0JTS

3.2 V6JTD 16V

200

216

216

243

209

Alfawiki.nl

249

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

A0A0653b

DIMENSIONSThe sizes arein mm andrefer to the car fitted withstandard tyres.
Slight changes with
optional tyres.
Height with
unladen vehicle.

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENTVOLUME
Capacity .................................. 320 dm3
Capacity with rear seat backrest folded ................................ 905 dm3

fig. 5

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

1.8 T. SPARK - 2.0 JTS

4489

967

2596

926

1362

1763

1524

1510

3.2 V6

4489

967

2596

926

1355

1763

1524

1510

JTD 16V

4489

967

2596

926

1366

1763

1524

1510

Alfawiki.nl

250

1.8 T. SPARK

2.0 JTS

3.2 V6JTD 16V

Weight empty (including fluids, 90% fuelin the tank and no optional)
kg

1290

1320

1410

1320

Payload (*) including
driver

kg

520

520

520

520

Max permissible
weights (**):– front axle
– rear axle
– total

kg
kg
kg

980
980
1810

980
980
1840

1040
980
1930

990
980
1885

Towable weights:– braked trailer– trailer without brake

kg
kg

1300
400

1300
400

1400
400

1300
400

Maximum load on ball(braked trailer)

kg

60

60

60

60

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSWEIGHTS(*) With special equipment (trailer towing device, etc.) the loadless weight increases, thereby reducing the payload, with regard to the maximum permissible loads.
(**) Loads not to be exceeded. It is the driver’s responsibility to place goods in the boot and/or on the loading surface in accordance with the maximum
permissible loads.

Alfawiki.nl

251

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSREFILLING
1.8 T.
SPARK

2.0
JTS

2.0 JTS
Selespeed

3.2 V6JTD 16V

Recommended products andgenuine lubricants(▲) Unleaded petrol with no less than
95 R.O.N(■) Diesel fuel for motor vehicles(Specification EN590)

Fuel tank:– including a reserve oflitreslitres63 (▲)
7 (▲)

63 (▲)
7 (▲)

63 (▲)
7 (▲)

63 (▲)
7 (▲)

63 (■)
7 (■)

Engine coolingsystemlitres

7.2

7.2

7,2

7.2

7.2

Oil sump and filter

litres4.4 (❏)

4.4 (❍)

4.4 (❍)

5.9 (❍)

4.5 (●)

Mechanical transmission/differential

litres

2.0

2.0

2.0

2.0

2.0

TUTELA CAR TECHNYX

Selespeed transmission

litres

–

–

0.6

–

–

TUTELA CAR CS SPEED

Hydraulic power steering

litres

1.2

1.2

1.2

1.2

1.2

TUTELA GI/A

Hydraulic brake circuitwith ABS

litres

0.52

0.52

0.52

0.52

0.52

TUTELA TOP 4
for Alfa RomeoWindscreen washer and rearscreen
washer fluid reservoir
litres– with headlamp washer
litres

2.5
4.2

2.5
4.2

2.5
4.2

2.5
4.2

2.5
4.2

Mixture of water and fluid
TUTELA
PROFESSIONAL SC 35

Alfawiki.nl

252

Mixture of distilled waterand PARAFLU UP at 50%(❏) SELENIA 20 K for Alfa Romeo(❍) SELENIA RACING(●) SELENIA WR

RECOMMENDED PRODUCTS AND THEIR SPECIFICATIONS
Use

Fluid and lubricant specifications
for correct car operation

Genuine fluids
and lubricants

Changeintervals

Lubricants for
petrol engines
1.8 T. SPARK

Synthetic-based oils, grade SAE 10W-40
FIAT 9.55535-G2 qualification

SELENIA 20K for
ALFA ROMEO

As per Service
Schedule

Lubricants for
petrol engines
2.0 JTS - 3.2 V6Synthetic-based oil, grade SAE 10W-60
FIAT 9.55535-H3 qualification

SELENIA RACING

As per Service
Schedule

Lubricants forMultijet engines

Synthetic-based oil, grade SAE 5W-40
FIAT 9.55535-N2 qualification.

SELENIA WR

As per Service
Schedule

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSFLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

Should non-genuine products be used, lubricants with minimum ACEA A3 properties for petrol engines and ACEA B4 for Diesel engines are tolerated; in thisevent top engine performance is not guaranteed.
Using low-quality products, not compliant with ACEA A3 and ACEA B4 properties and specifications could cause engine damages not covered by warranty.
For very cold temperatures, consult Alfa Romeo Authorised Services for the proper Selenia product to use.

Alfawiki.nl

253

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Use

Fluid and lubricant specifications
for correct car operation

Applications

Synthetic-based oil, grade SAE 75W-85
that passes API GL-4 PLUS, FIAT 9.55550

TUTELACAR TECHNYX

Mechanical gearbox anddifferential

Lubricant for automatic transmissions that passes“ATF DEXRON II D LEV” specification

TUTELA GI/A

Hydraulic power steering

Specific fluid for gear selector electrohydraulic actuators

TUTELA CAR CS SPEED

Selespeed
electrohydraulic actuator

Molibdenum disulphide, lithium soap based grease.

TUTELA STAR 500

CV joints
on wheel side

Brake fluid

Synthetic fluid, F.M.V.S.S. n. 116, DOT 4, ISO 4925, SAE J-1704

TUTELA TOP 4
for Alfa Romeo

Brake and clutch
hydraulic controls

PARAFLUUP

Protective agent for radiators

Protective with antifreeze action, red colour based on inhibited monoethylen
glycol and organic formula, that passes CUNA NC 956-16,
ASTM D 3306 specifications

Cooling circuits.
Proportion:
50% down to –35° C.
Not to be mixed withproducts having different
formulas.

Mixture of alcohol and surfactants CUNA NC 956-11

TUTELA
PROFESSIONAL SC 35

To be used diluted orundiluted

Lubricants and greases fortransmissions

Windscreen and rear window
washer fluid

Alfawiki.nl

254

Genuine fluids
and lubricants

The fuel consumption figures given in thetable below are determined on the basis of
the homologation tests set down by specific European directives.

– extra-urban cycle: frequent accelerating in all gears, simulating extraurban
use of the car; the speed varies between 0
and 120 km/h;

The procedures below are followed formeasuring consumption:– combined consumption: is calculated weighing about 37% of urban cycle
consumption and about 63% of extraurban
consumption.

– urban cycle: cold starting followed bydriving that simulates urban use of the car;

IMPORTANT The type of route,traffic situations, weather conditions,driving style, general conditions of
the vehicle, trim level/equipment/accessories, load, presence ofa roof rack, use of the climate control system, other situations that affect air drag may lead to different fuel consumption levels than thosemeasured (see “Reducing runningcosts and environment pollution” inthe chapter “Correct use of the car”).

1.8 T. SPARK

2.0 JTS

2.0 JTS
Selespeed

3.2 V6JTD 16V

Urban

12.1

12.2

12.2

18.6

8.2

Extraurban

6.4

6.7

6.7

8.7

4.8

Combined

8.5

8.7

8.7

12.4

6.1

Fuel consumption according to directive
2004/3/EC (litres x 100 km)

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSFUEL CONSUMPTION

Alfawiki.nl

255

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

CO2 EMISSIONS
CO2 emission levels at the exhaust given in the following table refer to combined consumption.
CO2 EMISSIONS ACCORDING TO 2004/3/EC DIRECTIVE (g/km)
1.8 T. SPARK

2.0 JTS

2.0 JTS Selespeed

3.2 V6JTD 16V

202

207

207

295

159

Alfawiki.nl

256

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSIONDASHBOARD

A0A0724b

fig. 1
1. Adjustable side air vents - 2. Fixed side window air vents - 3. Front passenger’s air bag - 4. Tailgate release button - 5. Cards holder (for versions/markets where applicable) - 6. Sound system (for versions/markets where applicable) - 7. Adjustable central air vents - 8. Upper fixed vent - 9. Glass/canholder (for versions/markets where applicable) - 10. Front fog light button - 11. Hazard light switch - 12. Rear fog light button - 13. External lights control lever - 14. Instrument panel - 15. Windscreen wiper stalk - 16. Bonnet opening lever - 17. Set of controls - 18. Ignition key and ignition switch - 19.
Horn - 20. Steering wheel locking/release lever - 21. Driver’s air bag - 22. Door locking button - 23. Heating/ventilation/climate controls - 24. Cigar
lighter/ashtray housing lid - 25. Temperature sensor - 26. Glovebox.

Alfawiki.nl

257

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSIONINSTRUMENT
PANEL
A. Fuel level gauge with reserve warning
light - B. Engine coolant fluid temperaturegauge with maximum temperature warning
light - C. Speedometer - D. Odometer display (mileage recorder, trip recorder withheadlamp position display - E. Reconfigurable multifunction display - F. Rev counter
NOTE On JTDM versions the scale bottom is at 6000 revs.
A0A0762bfig. 2 - Petrol versions

A. Fuel level gauge with reserve warning
light - B. Engine coolant fluid temperaturegauge with maximum temperature warning
light - C. Speedometer - D. Odometer display (mileage recorder, trip recorder withheadlamp position display - E. Reconfigurable multifunction display - F. Rev counter
NOTE On JTDM versions the scale bottom is at 6000 revs.

258

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 3 - Black Line versions

A0A0754b

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSION

A. Fuel level gauge with reserve warning
light - B. Engine coolant fluid temperaturegauge with maximum temperature warning
light - C. Speedometer - D. Odometer display (mileage recorder, trip recorder withheadlamp position display - E. Reconfigurable multifunction display - F. Rev counter

A0A0763b

fig. 4 - 2.0 JTS Selespeed versions

A. Fuel level gauge with reserve warning
light - B. Engine coolant fluid temperaturegauge with maximum temperature warning
light - C. Speedometer - D. Odometer display (mileage recorder, trip recorder withheadlamp position display - E. Reconfigurable multifunction display - F. Rev counter

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 5 - 3.2 V6 version

A0A0727b

259

ALPHABETICAL INDEXINDEX
ABS system .............................. 134
Accessories purchased by the user .. 127
Additional stop light (third stop) .... 200
Air bags .....................................

38

Air cleaner .................................. 229
Alfa Romeo CODE ........................

6

Armrest- front .....................................

17- rear ......................................

22

Ashtray- front ........................................ 124- rear ......................................... 125
ASR (system) ............................. 138

Battery- advice for preserving
the charge ............................. 232- checking the charge ........... 212-231- replacement ........................... 232
Body (maintenance) ................... 236

260

Body versions ............................. 241

Bonnet ...................................... 131
Boot- extension .............................. 19- lighting ................................. 129- luggage net ........................... 22- opening from inside ................ 128- opening with remotecontrol .. 8-128- restraining the load ................. 130- tailgate closing ....................... 129- warnings for carrying luggage ... 130
Boot light- changing bulbs ....................... 204
Brakes ....................................... 245
Braking lights (third stop)- changing bulbs ....................... 199
Bulbs- general instructions ................. 193- replacement ........................... 192- type of bulbs .......................... 193

Changing bulbs

Card and glass holder ................. 125

Correct use of the car ........... 169

Car maintenance .................... 216
Cell phones (provision) ................ 126
Alfawiki.nl
Changing a wheel .................. 181-183- general instructions ................. 192- types of bulbs ........................ 193
Checking levels ........................... 222
Cigar lighter ............................... 124
Cleaning and maintenance- body ..................................... 236- car interior ............................. 238- engine compartment ............... 238- windows ............................... 238
Climate control system .................

81

Climate control system,
automatic two-zone ..................

89

Clock .........................................

68

Controls ..................................... 106
CO2 emissions ............................ 256
CODE card ..................................

7

Courtesy light- changing bulbs ....................... 203
Cruise Control .............................

49

52
Diesel fuel filter ........................... 229
Diesel particulate filter (DPF) ........ 167
Digital multifunction display .......... 58
Dimensions ................................ 250
Direction indicators- changing front bulbs ................ 198- changing rear bulbs ................. 199- changing side bulbs ................. 198- switching on .......................... 46
Door locking system .................... 107
Door mirrors ............................... 23
Doors ........................................ 15

Electronic alarm system ..............

11
Emergency starting ...................... 179- coasting ................................ 181- starting with an auxiliary
battery .................................. 180
Engine codes/body versions ......... 241
Engine- identification codes ................. 241- marking ................................ 241- specifications ......................... 242
Engine compartment- bonnet .................................. 131- washing ................................ 238
Engine oil consumption ................ 224
Engine starting ........................... 169
Environmental protection .............. 168
EOBD (system) ........................... 140
External lights (switching on) ....... 44

First-aid kit ................................ 215
Fix &Go Automatic (device) ......... 186
Flashing high beams .................... 45
Fluids and lubricants .................... 253
Follow me home device ............... 46
Foglights- changing bulbs ....................... 196- switching on .......................... 106
Front ceiling light ........................ 121- changing bulbs ....................... 201
Front fog lights- changing bulbs ....................... 196- switching on .......................... 106
Fuel consumption ........................ 255
Fuel flap .................................... 167
Fuel supply ................................ 243
Alfawiki.nl
Fuses ........................................
205

Getting to know your car ...

6
Glove compartment ..................... 121
Glove compartment light- changing bulbs ....................... 203

Handbrake ............................... 108
Hazard warning lights- switching on .......................... 106
Headlamp beam adjustment ......... 108
Headlight washers ................. 49-236
Headlights- adjustment abroad .................. 133- compensation for tilt .......... 108-132
Headrests- front ..................................... 18- rear ...................................... 21
Heating and climate
control system ......................... 81
Hoses ........................................ 234

Identification data ...................... 240
Ignition device ............................ 14
Ignition switch andsteering lock ....................... 14-15
In an emergency .................... 179

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

Dashboard ................................

261

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

Inertial fuel cut off switch ............. 107
Installation of electric/
electronic devices ..................... 127
Instrument cluster ....................... 53
In the event of an accident ........... 215
Intelligent washing (windscreen) ... 47
Interior fittings (cleaning) ............. 238
Internal fittings .......................... 121- annual inspection programme ... 219- scheduled maintenance ........... 216- scheduled maintenanceprogramme ............................ 217
Manual heater ............................

83

Mechanical gearbox ..................... 109

Number plate lights- changing bulbs ....................... 200

Keys ........................................

6

Levers (steering wheel) ..............

44
44
29

Lights ........................................
Load limiters ..............................
Low beam headlights- changing bulbs ....................... 197- switching on ..................... 44-45
Luggage restrainer net ................. 22

Main beam headlights

262- changing bulbs ....................... 197- switching on .......................... 45
Maintenance- additional operations ............... 229

Oddment recesses ..................... 126
Paintwork ................................ 237
Parking ...................................... 172
Parking sensor ............................ 105
Performance ............................... 249
Pockets ..................................... 125

Rain sensor ................................ 48
Raising the car ............................ 214
Rear ceiling light ......................... 123- changing bulbs ....................... 202
Rear fog guards- changing bulbs ....................... 199- switching on .......................... 106
Rearview mirror .......................... 23
Reconfigurable multifunction
display .................................... 61
Reducing running costs ................ 172
Refuelling ............................. 166-252
Remote control ...........................
7
Rev counter ................................ 56
Reversing light- changing bulbs ....................... 199
Rims ......................................... 247

Pollen filter ................................ 230
Power windows ..........................

24

Pretensioners ..............................

28

Puddle lights .............................. 123- changing bulbs ....................... 201

Radio transmitters and cellular
telephones .............................. 127

Alfawiki.nl
Radio ........................................
141

Seat belts .................................
- carrying children safety ............
- front belt height adjustment .....
- general instructions .................
- load limiters ...........................
- maintenance ..........................
- pretensioners .........................

26
31
27
29
29
31
28

Technical specifications ........ 240
Towing the car ............................ 213
Towing trailers ............................ 174
Transmission ............................... 243
Tyres- correct reading ....................... 246- Fix&Go automatic ................... 186- inflating pressure .................... 249- replacement ........................... 181- snow chains ........................... 177- types of tyres and rims ............ 247- winter ................................... 177

VDC system ............................. 136

ALPHABETICAL INDEX- rear centre lap belt .................. 27- use of belts ............................ 26
Seats- front ..................................... 16- rear ...................................... 19
Selespeed gearbox ...................... 110
Sidelights- changing front bulbs ................ 197- changing rear bulbs ................. 199- switching on .......................... 45
Snow chains ............................... 177
Speedometer .............................. 56
Steering lock .............................. 15
Steering system .......................... 245
Steering wheel ........................... 22
Sun visors .................................. 126
Suspensions ............................... 245
Symbols .................................... 5-6

Vehicle inactivity ......................... 178

Warning lights and messages .....

72

Weights ..................................... 251
Wheel geometry ......................... 246
Wheels and tyres ................... 233-246
Windscreen washer- intelligent washing function ......

47- operation ...............................

47- spray jets .............................. 235
Windscreen wiper- blade replacement .................. 235- operation ...............................

47- rain sensor .............................

48- spray jets Alfawiki.nl.............................. 235

263

PROVISIONS FOR THE PROCESSING OF A VEHICLE
AT THE END OF ITS LIFE-CYCLE
For years now Alfa Romeo has been developing its global commitment towards the safeguarding and protection of the Environment throughthe continuous improvement of its production processes and the making of increasingly more “eco friendly” products. With a view to guaranteeing the best possible service to clients in full observance of environmental standards and in response to the obligations imposed by European Directive 2000/53/EC on end-of-life vehicles, Alfa Romeo offers its clients the possibility to hand in their vehicle* at the end of its life
span without additional costs.
The European Directive, in fact, provides for the take-back of the vehicle without the last holder or owner of the same incurring expenses dueto the fact that the market value of the vehicle is zero or negative. In particular, in almost all of the countries of theEuropean Union, up until 1st January 2007, take-back of the vehicle free of charge only applies to vehicles registered from 1 July 2002 on,while, from 2007 on, take-back will be carried out free of charge, independently of the year of registration, provided that the vehicle still contains all its essential component parts (especially engine and body) and is free from additional waste materials.
Our contracted network of authorised treatment facilities has been carefully selected in order to provide a quality service to our customers byde-polluting and recycling “End of Life Vehicles” to approved environmental standards. To find out the location of your nearest authorised
treatment facility, offering free of charge take-back, simply contact one of our dealers or refer to the Alfa Romeo web site or call the toll freenumber 00800 2532 0000.
* Passenger transportation vehicles to seat a max. of nine persons, having a total admissible weight of 3.5 t

Alfawiki.nl

NOTES...............................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................

Alfawiki.nl...............................................................................................................................................................................................

Alfawiki.nl

Alfawiki.nl

COLD TYRE INFLATION PRESSURES
full load

reduced load

Tyres
front

rear

front

rear

195/60 R15

bar

2.2

2.2

2.5

2.5

205/60 R15

bar

2.3

2.3

2.6

2.6

205/55 R16

bar

2.3

2.3

2.6

2.6

205/55 ZR16

bar

2.3

2.3

2.6

2.6

215/45 R17

bar

2.4

2.3

2.7

2.6

225/45 ZR17

bar

2.5

2.4

2.8

2.7

225/40 ZR18

bar

2.5

2.4

2.8

2.7

Compact spare wheel (*)
125/80 R15

bar

4.2

4.2

With the tyre hot the inflating pressure should be +0.3 bar compared with the specified ratingWith winter tyres the inflation pressure should be +0.2 bar compared with the specified rating(*) The compact spare wheel cannot be used on 3.2 V6 version
ENGINE OIL REPLACEMENTREFUELLING

Oil sump and filter (1.8 T. SPARK - 2.0 JTS) ........................ litres 4.4

Fuel tank capacity............................................................ litres 63
Reserve.......................................................................... litres 7

Oil sump and filter (3.2 V6) .............................................. litres 5.9
Oil sump and filter (JTD 16V) ............................................. litres 4.5
Do not discard used oil in the environment.

Only refuel petrol engines with unleaded petrol with octane rating (RON)
not less than 95.
Only refuel diesel engines with diesel fuel for motor vehicles (Specification EN590).

CUSTOMER SERVICESTECHNICAL SERVICES - SERVICE ENGINEERING
Largo Senatore G. Agnelli, 5 - 10040 Volvera - Torino (Italia)
Fiat Group Automobiles S.p.A.
Print No. 60431933 - 1st Edition - 05/2008

Alfawiki.nl

All rights reserved. Reproduction, even in part is prohibited without written permission
from Fiat Group Automobiles S.p.A.

SERVICEAlfawiki.nl